1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5452 arg "newline-insert newline"
5458 \begin_layout Subsection
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5490 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5499 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5500 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5501 describing some general features of all four of them.
5504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5511 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5520 reset the environment to
5524 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5525 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5526 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5534 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5543 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5545 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5546 you read all of section
5547 \begin_inset space ~
5551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5553 reference "sec:Nesting"
5560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5562 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5586 paragraph environment.
5587 It has the following properties:
5590 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5595 \begin_layout Itemize
5596 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5604 \begin_layout Itemize
5605 The items can have any length.
5606 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5607 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 environment inside another
5623 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5627 \begin_layout Itemize
5628 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 \begin_inset space ~
5641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5643 reference "sec:Nesting"
5647 for a full explanation of nesting.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5661 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5666 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5670 The label for the first level
5674 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 The label for the second level is a dash.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 Back out to the third level.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 Back to the second level.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 Back to the outermost level.
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 These are the default labels for an
5713 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5718 dialog in the submenu
5723 \begin_inset Index idx
5726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5732 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5737 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5739 \begin_inset space ~
5743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5745 reference "sec:Nesting"
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5766 name "sec:Enumerate"
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5778 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5779 It has these properties:
5782 \begin_layout Enumerate
5783 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5787 \begin_layout Enumerate
5788 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5792 \begin_layout Enumerate
5793 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5801 environment resets the counter to one.
5804 \begin_layout Enumerate
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5819 Items can have any length.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5844 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5845 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 The first level of an
5857 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5881 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 Back to the third level
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Back to the second level.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 Back to the outermost level.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5900 environment, see section
5901 \begin_inset space ~
5905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5907 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5912 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5916 There is more to nesting
5920 environments than we've stated here.
5921 You should read section
5922 \begin_inset space ~
5926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5928 reference "sec:Nesting"
5932 to learn more about nesting.
5935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_layout Standard
5950 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5954 list has no fixed label.
5955 Instead, LyX uses the first
5956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5963 of the first line as the label.
5967 \begin_layout Description
5968 Example: This is an example of the
5975 \begin_layout Standard
5976 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5989 it is meant that the first usage of the
5993 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5995 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6003 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6009 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 \begin_inset space ~
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6023 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6027 for more information.) Here is an example:
6030 \begin_layout Description
6032 \begin_inset space ~
6035 Example: This one shows how to use a
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Usage: You should use the
6055 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6056 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6058 It's not a good idea to use a
6062 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6063 You're better off using
6075 paragraphs into them.
6078 \begin_layout Description
6079 Nesting: You can nest
6083 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6087 \begin_layout Standard
6088 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6089 them from the first line.
6092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6094 \begin_inset Index idx
6097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6111 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6114 \begin_layout Standard
6123 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6125 Here are its properties:
6128 \begin_layout Labeling
6129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6134 labels LyX uses the first
6135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6142 of each line as the item label.
6147 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6148 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6149 space as described above.
6152 \begin_layout Labeling
6153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6154 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6155 the body of the item text.
6156 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6157 label width plus a little extra space.
6161 \begin_layout Labeling
6162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6164 \begin_inset space ~
6167 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6169 If the label width is larger, the label
6170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6177 into the first line.
6178 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6179 margin of the rest of the item text.
6182 \begin_layout Labeling
6183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6185 \begin_inset space ~
6188 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6193 environment has the same left margin.
6194 \begin_inset Newline newline
6197 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6200 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6202 \begin_inset space ~
6207 dialog (toolbar button
6210 arg "layout-paragraph"
6217 \begin_inset space ~
6222 determines the default label width.
6223 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6232 multiple times instead.
6233 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6250 every time you alter a label in a
6255 \begin_inset Newline newline
6258 The predefined default width is the length of
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6278 list the same way as the
6282 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6288 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6298 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 to learn about nesting.
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6314 There is yet another feature of the
6318 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6320 You can use additional
6324 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6329 are documented in section
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6336 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6341 Here are some examples:
6344 \begin_layout Labeling
6345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6346 Left The default for
6353 \begin_layout Labeling
6354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6362 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6365 \begin_layout Labeling
6366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6378 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6381 \begin_layout Subsection
6383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6385 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6390 \begin_inset Index idx
6393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 The features described in this section require that the module
6405 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6407 is loaded in the document settings.
6408 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6413 \begin_inset Index idx
6416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6417 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6426 Custom Enumerate Lists
6427 \begin_inset Index idx
6430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6441 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6444 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6447 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6448 There you add the command
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6459 \begin_layout Standard
6460 in TeX Code (shortcut
6470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6472 \begin_inset space ~
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6478 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6491 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6498 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6499 For capital Roman numerals replace
6511 in the command above.
6512 For Arabic numerals use
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 You can only number 26
6553 \begin_inset space ~
6556 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6564 \begin_layout Standard
6565 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6566 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6569 \begin_layout Standard
6570 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6573 \begin_layout Enumerate
6574 \begin_inset Argument 1
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 \begin_layout Enumerate
6604 \begin_inset Argument 1
6607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Enumerate
6635 \begin_layout Enumerate
6636 \begin_inset Argument 1
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_inset Argument 1
6667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6694 For this list these commands were used:
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6708 \begin_inset Newline newline
6716 \begin_inset Newline newline
6724 \begin_inset Newline newline
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6741 makes the label emphasized and
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6760 lists until you change the definition.
6768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6770 \begin_inset Index idx
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6774 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6783 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6786 \begin_layout Enumerate
6787 \begin_inset Argument 1
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_inset Note Note
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 goes back to default numbering
6821 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_layout Standard
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6839 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6840 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6843 \begin_layout Standard
6844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6861 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6863 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6864 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6865 of a normal enumeration.
6866 There, insert the command
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6875 \begin_layout Standard
6880 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6884 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6893 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6897 \begin_inset Argument 1
6900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 This enumeration starts at 4
6919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6921 \begin_inset Index idx
6924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6936 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6939 \begin_layout Itemize
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6944 with standard spacing
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6948 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6950 Add there the command
6954 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6957 \begin_layout Itemize
6958 \begin_inset Argument 1
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Itemize
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6995 \begin_inset Index idx
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7005 For more information see its documentation,
7006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7018 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7019 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7023 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 with negative indentation
7055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7056 Further Customization
7057 \begin_inset Index idx
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 Lists ! Customization
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7070 You can also change the style of description lists.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 changes the description label font, the command
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 sets the list style.
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 An example where the command
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7103 itshape, style=nextline
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_layout Description
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7116 \begin_inset Argument 1
7119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7127 itshape, style=nextline
7137 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7138 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7142 \begin_layout Description
7144 \begin_inset space ~
7147 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7148 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7149 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7152 \begin_layout Standard
7153 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7169 For more information see its documentation
7170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7179 \begin_layout Subsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset space ~
7198 Address: An Overview
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7210 \begin_inset space ~
7216 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7217 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7218 In contrast, you can use the
7225 \begin_inset space ~
7230 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7231 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7236 Of course, you're not limited to using
7243 \begin_inset space ~
7252 \begin_inset space ~
7257 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7258 some European academic papers.
7261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7265 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7278 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7282 \begin_inset space ~
7287 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7288 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7289 Here's an example of each:
7292 \begin_layout Right Address
7294 \begin_inset Newline newline
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7305 When is it? What is today?
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset space ~
7318 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7319 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7320 Here's an example of the
7327 \begin_layout Address
7329 \begin_inset Newline newline
7332 Where do I send this
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Your post office and country
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 As you can see, both
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7352 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7357 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7363 This makes sense, since
7371 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7372 Thus, you have to use
7379 arg "newline-insert newline"
7384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7396 ) to start a new line in an
7403 \begin_inset space ~
7411 \begin_layout Subsection
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7416 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7417 or list of references.
7418 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 \begin_inset Index idx
7426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7440 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7441 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7442 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7443 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7457 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7458 The book document classes ignores the
7462 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7466 in a letter document class.
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7474 environment does several things for you.
7475 First, it puts the centered label
7476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7484 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7486 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7487 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7488 the subsequent text.
7489 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7490 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7494 \begin_layout Standard
7495 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7499 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7500 The new paragraph will still be in the
7505 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7506 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_inset Float figure
7515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7517 \begin_inset Graphics
7518 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7531 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7553 We would love to demonstrate the
7557 environment, but since this document is in the
7558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7565 class, we can't do this.
7566 We inserted it therefore as figure
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7573 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7578 If you have never heard of an
7579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7586 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7591 \begin_inset Index idx
7594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7603 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7615 environment is used to list references.
7616 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7617 only use it at the end of the document.
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7630 When you first open a
7634 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7650 depending on the document class.
7651 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7652 Each paragraph of the
7656 environment is a bibliography entry.
7661 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7662 Each new paragraph is still in the
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7671 by using a BibTeX database.
7672 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7673 phy handling, have a look at section
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7688 Special Environments
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7693 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is a LyX extension.
7725 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7730 key as a fixed whitespace.
7734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 \begin_inset space ~
7751 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7764 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7766 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7769 arg "newline-insert newline"
7786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7787 So, when you finish using the
7791 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7792 Also, you can nest the
7796 environment inside of others.
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7803 \begin_layout Itemize
7807 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7815 \begin_inset space \space{}
7825 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 arg "newline-insert newline"
7845 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7853 You must put at least one
7857 in any line you want blank.
7858 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7862 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7866 since that will insert
7871 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7874 arg "self-insert \""
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 printf("Hello World!
7906 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 This is just the standard
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7932 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7934 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7935 as if you used a typewriter.
7936 \begin_inset Index idx
7939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 Paragraph environments|)
7945 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7948 Program Code Listings
7953 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7965 \begin_inset Index idx
7968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7982 environment is similar to the
7986 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7987 computer console text.
7992 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8005 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8006 you can have empty lines.
8018 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 have a certain language and a text style
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8028 \begin_layout Itemize
8029 contain the following characters (you will get LaTeX errors): µ ; ´ ; ³
8033 \begin_layout Standard
8034 Because of these properties
8038 works like a typewriter.
8042 \begin_layout Verbatim
8047 \begin_layout Verbatim
8051 The following 2 lines are empty:
8054 \begin_layout Verbatim
8058 \begin_layout Verbatim
8062 \begin_layout Verbatim
8064 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8069 \begin_layout Section
8070 Nesting Environments
8071 \begin_inset Index idx
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8075 Nesting ! Environments
8081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8090 \begin_layout Subsection
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8097 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8099 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8101 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8113 \begin_layout Enumerate
8117 \begin_layout Enumerate
8122 \begin_layout Enumerate
8126 \begin_layout Enumerate
8131 \begin_layout Enumerate
8135 \begin_layout Standard
8136 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8137 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8139 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8141 \begin_inset space ~
8145 \begin_inset space ~
8153 \begin_inset space ~
8157 \begin_inset space ~
8162 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8164 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8167 arg "depth-increment"
8173 arg "depth-decrement"
8187 arg "depth-increment"
8193 arg "depth-decrement"
8197 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8198 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8203 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8204 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8205 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8206 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8210 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8211 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8213 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8216 \begin_layout Subsection
8217 What You Can and Can't Nest
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8222 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8226 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8227 than a simple yes or no.
8228 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8231 \begin_layout Itemize
8232 Completely unnestable
8235 \begin_layout Itemize
8236 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8240 \begin_layout Itemize
8241 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8247 environments have them:
8250 \begin_layout Description
8251 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8252 Can't nest into them.
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 \begin_layout Itemize
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8280 \begin_layout Itemize
8287 \begin_layout Description
8289 \begin_inset space ~
8292 Nestable You can nest them.
8293 You can nest other things into them.
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 \begin_layout Itemize
8315 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8327 \begin_layout Itemize
8333 \begin_layout Itemize
8339 \begin_layout Itemize
8345 \begin_layout Itemize
8352 \begin_layout Description
8353 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8354 You can't nest anything into them.
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8376 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8424 \begin_layout Itemize
8430 \begin_layout Itemize
8436 \begin_layout Itemize
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_layout Itemize
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8462 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8475 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8476 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8477 nested section headings violate this.
8485 \begin_layout Subsection
8486 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8487 \begin_inset Index idx
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8491 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8499 \begin_layout Standard
8500 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8501 affected by nesting anyhow.
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 \begin_layout Itemize
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8527 Figures and tables in
8531 are not affected by this.
8536 Have a look at section
8537 \begin_inset space ~
8541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8543 reference "sec:Floats"
8547 for more information about
8554 \begin_layout Standard
8555 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8556 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8560 \begin_layout Standard
8561 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8569 of its own, it behaves just like a
8570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8577 paragraph environment.
8578 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8582 \begin_layout Standard
8583 Here's an example with a table:
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8591 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 This is (a) and it's nested.
8596 \begin_layout Standard
8597 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8605 \begin_inset Tabular
8606 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8607 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8609 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
8703 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8707 \begin_layout Enumerate
8711 \begin_layout Standard
8712 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8720 \begin_layout Enumerate
8721 This is (a) and it's nested.
8725 \begin_layout Standard
8726 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8734 \begin_inset Tabular
8735 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8736 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8737 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8738 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 \begin_layout Standard
8823 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8829 \begin_layout Enumerate
8836 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8839 \begin_layout Enumerate
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8851 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8859 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 This is (a) and it's nested.
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8870 \begin_layout Standard
8872 \begin_inset Tabular
8873 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8874 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8875 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8968 \begin_layout Enumerate
8970 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8977 \begin_layout Enumerate
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8988 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8989 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8993 \begin_layout Subsection
8994 Usage and General Features
8997 \begin_layout Standard
8998 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9007 is the innermost possible depth.
9008 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9012 level #1 – outermost
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 \begin_layout Itemize
9036 \begin_layout Itemize
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9046 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9047 both of them in the example.
9048 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9058 For example, if we tried to nest another
9063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9070 , we would get errors.
9073 \begin_layout Subsection
9075 \begin_inset Index idx
9078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 \begin_layout Standard
9088 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9089 We have several examples of nested environments.
9090 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9095 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9098 \begin_layout Labeling
9099 \labelwidthstring MMM
9100 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9109 \begin_layout Labeling
9110 \labelwidthstring MMM
9111 #2-a This is level #2.
9112 We created it by using
9115 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9121 arg "depth-increment"
9128 \begin_layout Labeling
9129 \labelwidthstring MMM
9130 #3-a This is level #3.
9131 This time, we just enter
9138 arg "depth-increment"
9142 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9146 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9152 arg "depth-increment"
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9164 environment, nested inside of
9165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9173 So, it's at level #4.
9174 We did this by entering
9177 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9183 arg "depth-increment"
9186 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9191 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9212 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9215 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9221 \begin_layout Labeling
9222 \labelwidthstring MMM
9223 #4-a This is level #4.
9227 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9230 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9235 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9239 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9244 keep nesting things inside
9245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9256 \begin_layout Labeling
9257 \labelwidthstring MMM
9258 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9263 \begin_layout Labeling
9264 \labelwidthstring MMM
9265 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9266 and this is level #6.
9267 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9271 \begin_layout Labeling
9272 \labelwidthstring MMM
9273 #5-b Back to level #5.
9277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9283 arg "depth-decrement"
9290 \begin_layout Labeling
9291 \labelwidthstring MMM
9295 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9301 arg "depth-decrement"
9304 , we're back at level #4.
9308 \begin_layout Labeling
9309 \labelwidthstring MMM
9310 #3-b Back to level #3.
9311 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9315 \begin_layout Labeling
9316 \labelwidthstring MMM
9317 #2-b Back to level #2.
9322 \begin_layout Labeling
9323 \labelwidthstring MMM
9324 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9325 After this sentence, we will enter
9329 and change the paragraph environment back to
9336 \begin_layout Standard
9337 We could have also used the
9353 environment in place of the
9358 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9362 Example 2: Inheritance
9365 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9366 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9369 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9378 arg "depth-increment"
9382 \begin_inset Newline newline
9385 which, we will change to the
9393 \begin_layout Enumerate
9398 environment, at level #2.
9401 \begin_layout Enumerate
9402 Notice how the nested
9406 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9410 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 We ended this example by entering
9420 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9424 and reset the nesting depth by using
9427 arg "depth-decrement"
9433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9434 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9443 \begin_inset Argument 1
9446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9447 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9455 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 This is level #1, in an
9460 paragraph environment.
9461 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9465 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9476 arg "depth-increment"
9480 Now, what happens if we nest an
9484 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9485 label be? An asterisk?
9489 \begin_layout Itemize
9499 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9500 So, its label is a bullet.
9501 (We got here by using
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the environment to
9521 \begin_layout Itemize
9522 Here's level #4, produced using
9525 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9531 arg "depth-increment"
9535 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9540 \begin_layout Enumerate
9541 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9543 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9548 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9552 , because we are in the
9560 environment (that is, it is an
9575 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9581 type of numbering does LyX use?
9584 \begin_layout Enumerate
9585 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9588 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9591 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9594 \begin_layout Enumerate
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9601 to decrease the depth after the next
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 \begin_layout Enumerate
9613 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9619 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9620 numeral as the label.Why?
9623 \begin_layout Enumerate
9624 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9633 Notice, however, that LyX
9637 reset the counter for the label.
9641 \begin_layout Enumerate
9645 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9651 arg "depth-decrement"
9654 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9655 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9656 into the twofold-nested
9664 \begin_layout Enumerate
9665 The same thing happens if we do another
9668 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9674 arg "depth-decrement"
9677 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9680 \begin_layout Standard
9681 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9686 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9700 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9706 The same rule applies for the
9710 environment, as well.
9713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9714 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9717 \begin_layout Enumerate
9718 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9719 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9720 the same detail with how we did it.
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9737 arg "depth-increment"
9744 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9745 the example in parentheses someplace.
9746 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9747 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9748 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9762 Now we will add verse.
9763 \begin_inset Newline newline
9766 It will get much worse.
9767 \begin_inset Newline newline
9777 arg "depth-increment"
9788 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9789 \begin_inset Newline newline
9792 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9793 \begin_inset Newline newline
9799 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9812 \begin_layout Standard
9813 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9819 \begin_layout Standard
9821 \begin_inset Tabular
9822 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9823 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9824 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9825 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 arg "depth-increment"
9930 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9936 \begin_inset Newline newline
9944 arg "depth-decrement"
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 : level #1) This is another item.
9957 Note that selecting a
9961 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9962 3 times to put the table inside the
9970 \begin_layout Quotation
9971 We're now ending the
9975 list and changing to
9980 We're still at level #1.
9981 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9982 The next set of paragraphs is a
9983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9990 We will nest both the
9997 \begin_inset space ~
10002 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10006 for the letter body.
10010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10013 to preserve the depth.
10014 Remember that you need to use
10017 arg "newline-insert newline"
10020 to create multiple lines inside the
10027 \begin_inset space ~
10037 \begin_layout Right Address
10039 \begin_inset Newline newline
10042 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10043 \begin_inset Newline newline
10049 \begin_layout Address
10051 \begin_inset space ~
10057 \begin_layout Quotation
10058 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10062 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10063 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10064 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10065 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10066 as soon as possible.
10067 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10070 \begin_layout Quotation
10071 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10072 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10073 with your order, along with payment.
10076 \begin_layout Quotation
10077 We thank you again for your patience.
10080 \begin_layout Address
10082 \begin_inset Newline newline
10089 \begin_layout Quotation
10090 That ends that example!
10093 \begin_layout Standard
10094 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10095 just a few keystrokes.
10096 We could have easily nested an
10117 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10120 \begin_layout Subsection
10122 \begin_inset Index idx
10125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10126 Nesting ! Separation
10132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10134 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10141 \begin_layout Standard
10142 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10144 For example you need two different enumerations:
10147 \begin_layout Enumerate
10152 \begin_layout Enumerate
10157 \begin_layout Enumerate
10161 \begin_layout --Separator--
10165 \begin_layout Itemize
10171 \begin_layout --Separator--
10175 \begin_layout Enumerate
10179 \begin_layout Enumerate
10183 \begin_layout Enumerate
10187 \begin_layout Standard
10188 To tell LyX that there are two lists an not one, set the cursor at the end
10189 of the last item and use the menu
10191 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10192 Start New Parent Environment
10195 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10196 If you use instead the menu
10198 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10199 Start New Environment
10201 a new list will also be created, but in the same besting level.
10204 \begin_layout Standard
10205 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10209 arg "paragraph-break"
10216 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10219 \begin_layout Section
10220 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10221 \begin_inset Index idx
10224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10233 \begin_layout Standard
10234 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10235 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10236 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10237 be broken at the end of a line.
10238 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10242 \begin_layout Subsection
10244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10246 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10251 \begin_inset Index idx
10254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10263 \begin_layout Standard
10264 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10265 line at that point.
10266 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10269 \begin_layout Quote
10270 Further documentation is given in section
10271 \begin_inset Newline newline
10275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10277 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10285 \begin_layout Standard
10286 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10301 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10310 A protected space is set with
10312 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10313 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10315 \begin_inset space ~
10323 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10329 \begin_layout Subsection
10331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10333 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10338 \begin_inset Index idx
10341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10342 Spacing ! Horizontal
10350 \begin_layout Standard
10351 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10353 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10354 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10358 The length units are listed in Appendix
10359 \begin_inset space ~
10363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10365 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10376 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10381 \begin_inset Index idx
10384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10385 Spaces ! Inter-word
10393 \begin_layout Standard
10394 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10395 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10396 at the ends of sentences.
10397 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10398 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10399 followed by a period; see section
10400 \begin_inset space ~
10404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10406 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10411 To insert a normal space, select
10413 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10414 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10416 \begin_inset space ~
10424 arg "space-insert normal"
10430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10434 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10439 \begin_inset Index idx
10442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10451 \begin_layout Standard
10453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10460 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10469 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10470 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10471 inside abbreviations:
10474 \begin_layout Quote
10476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10480 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10483 \begin_layout Standard
10484 or between values and units.
10485 Compare for example this:
10486 \begin_inset Newline newline
10490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10494 \begin_inset Newline newline
10497 10 kg (normal space
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10503 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10504 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10506 \begin_inset space ~
10514 arg "space-insert thin"
10520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10524 \begin_layout Standard
10525 You can also insert the following space types:
10528 \begin_layout Description
10530 \begin_inset space ~
10534 \begin_inset space ~
10537 space A line with a
10538 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10542 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10546 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10549 negative thin space between the arrows.
10552 \begin_layout Description
10554 \begin_inset space ~
10558 \begin_inset space ~
10561 space A line with a
10562 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10566 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10570 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10573 negative medium space between the arrows.
10576 \begin_layout Description
10578 \begin_inset space ~
10582 \begin_inset space ~
10585 space A line with a
10586 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10590 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10594 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10597 negative thick space between the arrows.
10600 \begin_layout Description
10602 \begin_inset space ~
10606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10610 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10614 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10618 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10622 \begin_inset space ~
10626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10629 em) space between the arrows.
10632 \begin_layout Description
10634 \begin_inset space ~
10638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10642 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10646 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10650 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10654 \begin_inset space ~
10658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10661 em) space between the arrows.
10664 \begin_layout Description
10666 \begin_inset space ~
10670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10674 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10678 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10682 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10686 \begin_inset space ~
10690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10693 em) space between the arrows.
10696 \begin_layout Description
10698 \begin_inset space ~
10702 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10706 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10711 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10718 cm space between the arrows.
10721 \begin_layout Standard
10723 \begin_inset space ~
10727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10729 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10733 lists the different space sizes.
10736 \begin_layout Standard
10737 \begin_inset Float table
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10743 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10748 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10752 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10762 \begin_inset Tabular
10763 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10764 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10765 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10766 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10882 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11041 \begin_inset Index idx
11044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 \begin_layout Standard
11054 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11055 in a uniform fashion.
11056 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11057 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11058 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11059 equally between themselves.
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11063 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11066 \begin_layout Quote
11068 This is on the left side
11069 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11072 This is on the right
11075 \begin_layout Quote
11078 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11082 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11088 \begin_layout Quote
11091 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11095 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11099 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11105 \begin_layout Standard
11106 That was an example in the
11112 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11116 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11120 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11123 is one in a standard paragraph.
11124 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11128 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11131 \begin_layout Standard
11132 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11135 \begin_inset space ~
11140 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11143 \begin_layout Standard
11145 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11149 \begin_inset space ~
11155 \begin_layout Standard
11157 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11161 \begin_inset space ~
11167 \begin_layout Standard
11169 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11173 \begin_inset space ~
11179 \begin_layout Standard
11181 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11185 \begin_inset space ~
11191 \begin_layout Standard
11193 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11197 \begin_inset space ~
11203 \begin_layout Standard
11205 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11209 \begin_inset space ~
11215 \begin_layout Standard
11216 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11224 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11228 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11229 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11230 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11234 option in the space dialog.
11242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11246 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11251 \begin_inset Index idx
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_layout Standard
11264 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11265 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11268 \begin_layout Standard
11269 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11272 What is correct English?:
11273 \begin_inset Newline newline
11277 \begin_inset Newline newline
11281 \begin_inset space ~
11284 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11285 \begin_inset Newline newline
11289 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 \begin_inset Newline newline
11304 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11321 \begin_layout Standard
11323 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11328 \begin_inset space ~
11332 \begin_inset space ~
11336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11340 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11342 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11343 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11347 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11353 \begin_inset space ~
11357 \begin_inset space ~
11361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11364 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11373 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11374 That is why it is named
11375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11383 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11384 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11388 \begin_layout Subsection
11390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11392 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11397 \begin_inset Index idx
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11409 \begin_layout Standard
11410 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11412 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11413 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11415 \begin_inset space ~
11421 There you find the following sizes:
11424 \begin_layout Standard
11437 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11442 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11444 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11445 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11447 \begin_inset space ~
11453 \begin_inset Index idx
11456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11457 Document ! Settings
11462 for the paragraph separation.
11463 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11474 \begin_layout Standard
11480 \begin_inset Index idx
11483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11489 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11490 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11495 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11496 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11505 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11514 s are described in section
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11521 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11530 If there are several
11534 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11535 You can therefore use
11539 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11542 \begin_layout Standard
11547 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11548 \begin_inset space ~
11552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11554 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11572 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11573 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11585 \begin_layout Subsection
11586 Paragraph Alignment
11587 \begin_inset Index idx
11590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11591 Paragraph ! Alignment
11599 \begin_layout Standard
11600 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11602 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11605 dialog (toolbar button
11608 arg "layout-paragraph"
11612 There are five possibilities:
11615 \begin_layout Itemize
11623 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11629 \begin_layout Itemize
11637 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11643 \begin_layout Itemize
11651 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11657 \begin_layout Itemize
11665 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11671 \begin_layout Itemize
11679 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11685 \begin_layout Standard
11686 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11687 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11688 the left and right margins.
11689 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11692 \begin_layout Standard
11694 This paragraph is right aligned,
11697 \begin_layout Standard
11699 this one is centered,
11702 \begin_layout Standard
11704 this one is left aligned.
11707 \begin_layout Subsection
11709 \begin_inset Index idx
11712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11713 Page breaks ! Forced
11719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11721 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11728 \begin_layout Standard
11729 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11730 can force a page break where you want one.
11731 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11732 Only if you use a lot of
11736 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11739 \begin_layout Standard
11740 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11741 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11745 have to change the page breaking.
11748 \begin_layout Standard
11749 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11751 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11753 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11754 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11756 \begin_inset space ~
11762 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11764 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11765 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11767 \begin_inset space ~
11772 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11774 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11775 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11778 \begin_layout Standard
11779 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11780 at the top of a page.
11781 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11782 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11783 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11784 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11788 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11792 to learn more about
11799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11803 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11808 \begin_inset Index idx
11811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11812 Page breaks ! Clear
11820 \begin_layout Standard
11821 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11822 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11823 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11824 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11825 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11828 \begin_layout Standard
11829 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11831 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11832 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11834 \begin_inset space ~
11840 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11842 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11843 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11845 \begin_inset space ~
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11854 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11855 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11858 \begin_layout Subsection
11860 \begin_inset Index idx
11863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11872 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11879 \begin_layout Standard
11880 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11882 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11884 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11885 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11887 \begin_inset space ~
11891 \begin_inset space ~
11899 arg "newline-insert newline"
11903 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11905 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11906 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11908 \begin_inset space ~
11912 \begin_inset space ~
11920 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11923 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11925 This is useful to avoid
11926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11933 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11936 \begin_layout Standard
11937 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11938 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11939 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11940 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11941 \begin_inset space ~
11945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11947 reference "sec:Quote"
11952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11954 reference "sec:Verse"
11959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11961 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11968 \begin_layout Subsection
11970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11972 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11977 \begin_inset Index idx
11980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11989 \begin_layout Standard
11991 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12002 \begin_layout Standard
12006 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12007 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12009 \begin_inset space ~
12014 you can insert horizontal lines.
12015 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12016 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12017 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12020 \begin_layout Standard
12022 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12033 \begin_layout Section
12034 Characters and Symbols
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12038 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12039 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12040 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12048 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12052 for information on how this is done.
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12056 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12061 dialog via the menu
12063 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12064 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12070 \begin_layout Standard
12071 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12079 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12080 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12081 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12089 \begin_layout Section
12090 Fonts and Text Styles
12091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12093 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12100 \begin_layout Subsection
12102 \begin_inset Index idx
12105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12114 \begin_layout Standard
12115 There are two types of fonts:
12118 \begin_layout Description
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12124 \begin_inset Index idx
12127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12133 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12138 characters) in the font.
12139 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12140 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12141 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12142 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12143 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12144 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12145 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12146 \begin_inset Newline newline
12149 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12150 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12151 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12152 sizes than at small ones.
12153 \begin_inset Newline newline
12167 \begin_inset space ~
12175 \begin_layout Description
12177 \begin_inset space ~
12181 \begin_inset Index idx
12184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12190 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12191 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12192 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12193 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12194 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12195 image manipulation program.
12196 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12197 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12201 pixels high up to 34
12202 \begin_inset space ~
12205 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12206 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12207 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12209 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12210 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12211 \begin_inset Newline newline
12214 Bitmap fonts are named
12217 \begin_inset space ~
12222 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12225 \begin_layout Standard
12226 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12227 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12228 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12229 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12230 use scalable fonts.
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12234 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12237 \begin_layout Standard
12238 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12239 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12240 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12241 font to emphasize text, you use an
12242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12250 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12251 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12255 \begin_layout Subsection
12257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12259 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12266 \begin_layout Standard
12267 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12268 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12269 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12271 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12272 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12273 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12274 to a word processor.
12275 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12276 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12277 across different machines.
12278 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12279 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12281 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12289 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12294 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12295 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12298 \begin_layout Standard
12299 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12300 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12302 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12303 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12304 that is installed on your system.
12305 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12308 \begin_layout Standard
12309 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12317 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12318 es; so you might have to experiment.
12326 \begin_layout Standard
12327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12335 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12336 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12344 \begin_layout Subsection
12345 Document Font and Font size
12346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12348 name "sub:Document-Font"
12353 \begin_inset Index idx
12356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12363 \begin_inset Index idx
12366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12375 \begin_layout Standard
12376 You can set the document fonts in the
12378 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12382 \begin_inset Index idx
12385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12386 Document ! Settings
12396 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12397 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12400 \begin_inset space ~
12409 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12411 \begin_inset space ~
12414 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12433 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12434 This requires that you use
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12479 as the output format, i.
12480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12484 \begin_inset space \space{}
12487 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12494 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12499 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12500 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12502 \begin_inset space ~
12505 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12506 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12507 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12509 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12512 \begin_layout Standard
12513 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12518 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12523 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12524 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12550 European Computer Modern
12553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12560 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12563 \begin_layout Standard
12572 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12573 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12578 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12586 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12592 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12593 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12596 \begin_layout Itemize
12600 \begin_inset space ~
12605 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12618 \begin_inset space ~
12623 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12627 as the default font.
12628 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12629 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12632 \begin_inset space ~
12645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12646 One difference is improved kerning.
12654 \begin_layout Itemize
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12662 \begin_inset space ~
12667 fonts in (the rare) case that
12670 \begin_inset space ~
12675 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12690 Virtual means that it
12691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12702 -glyphs from other fonts.
12703 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 Loading the LaTeX-package
12730 \begin_inset Index idx
12733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12739 with the document preamble line
12740 \begin_inset Newline newline
12747 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12748 \begin_inset Newline newline
12753 will fix the guillemet problem.
12758 and that accented characters are not
12762 glyph, but built of
12766 characters, the accent and the letter.
12767 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12773 If you search for example for the French word
12774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12781 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12790 and not for the glyph
12791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12795 \begin_inset space ~
12799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12805 \begin_layout Itemize
12806 If you do not like the look of
12814 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12819 \begin_inset space ~
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12835 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12836 \begin_inset space ~
12839 serif and typewriter fonts,
12843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12844 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12851 \begin_inset space ~
12860 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12865 \begin_inset space \space{}
12873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12877 \begin_inset space \space{}
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12891 \begin_inset space ~
12901 but you can also select your own.
12902 \begin_inset Newline newline
12905 The differences between roman,
12908 \begin_inset space ~
12917 fonts are explained in section
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12924 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12929 \begin_inset Newline newline
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12940 was originally designed for newspapers.
12941 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12942 into the small newspaper columns.
12946 \begin_inset space ~
12951 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12954 \begin_layout Standard
12955 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12968 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12973 depends on the class you are using.
12974 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12977 \begin_layout Standard
12978 Note that the font size is the
12983 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12984 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12985 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12994 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12995 \begin_inset space ~
12999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13001 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13008 \begin_layout Standard
13012 \begin_inset space ~
13017 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13022 serif or typewriter.
13027 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13037 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13040 \begin_layout Standard
13049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13058 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13064 \begin_inset Index idx
13067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13068 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13074 \begin_inset space ~
13078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13080 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13085 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13086 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13093 \begin_layout Standard
13094 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13096 Use Old Style Figures
13100 Use True Small Caps
13103 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13106 Use Old Style Figures
13108 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13110 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13118 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13122 Use True Small Caps
13124 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13125 of scaled capitals.
13126 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13127 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13130 \begin_layout Standard
13135 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13136 a font to display the script characters.
13140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13141 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13146 \begin_inset Index idx
13149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13150 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13155 So this has no effect for the document language
13169 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13173 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13181 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13185 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13186 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13187 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13189 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13192 dialog, see section
13193 \begin_inset space ~
13197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13199 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13211 \begin_layout Subsection
13215 \begin_layout Standard
13216 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13218 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13219 choose a math font in the dialog
13221 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13225 \begin_inset Index idx
13228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13229 Document ! Settings
13235 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13236 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13237 default font family
13238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13244 \begin_inset space ~
13250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13254 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13255 the document font is available.
13258 \begin_layout Standard
13259 Note that the math font will not be used for
13263 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13269 or by the insertion of the command
13276 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13277 \begin_inset space ~
13281 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13282 while the math characters do not.
13284 \begin_inset space ~
13287 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13290 \begin_inset space ~
13298 \begin_inset space ~
13303 in the document font settings.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13307 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13308 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13315 \begin_inset space ~
13321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13324 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13332 \begin_inset space ~
13338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13344 \begin_layout Subsection
13345 Using Different Character Styles
13346 \begin_inset Index idx
13349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13356 \begin_inset Index idx
13359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13368 \begin_layout Standard
13369 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13370 certain paragraph environments.
13371 LyX supports two character styles,
13380 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13384 \begin_layout Standard
13389 style, do one of the following:
13392 \begin_layout Itemize
13393 click on the toolbar button
13402 \begin_layout Itemize
13403 use the key binding
13412 \begin_layout Standard
13413 These commands are all toggles.
13418 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13421 \begin_layout Standard
13422 One typically uses the
13426 style for proper names.
13428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13435 is the original author of LyX.
13436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13442 \begin_layout Standard
13443 A more widely used character style is the
13448 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13455 \begin_layout Itemize
13456 clicking on the toolbar button
13465 \begin_layout Itemize
13466 using the keybindings
13475 \begin_layout Standard
13480 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13481 es use a different font.
13484 \begin_layout Standard
13485 We've been using the
13489 style all over the place in this document.
13490 Here's one more example:
13493 \begin_layout Quotation
13496 Do not overuse character styles!
13499 \begin_layout Standard
13500 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13501 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13502 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13503 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13507 \begin_layout Standard
13508 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13516 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13518 \begin_inset space ~
13521 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13527 arg "dialog-show character"
13533 \begin_layout Subsection
13534 Fine-Tuning with the
13539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13541 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13546 \begin_inset Index idx
13549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 \begin_layout Standard
13559 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13560 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13561 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13562 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13563 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13564 from ordinary dialog.
13567 \begin_layout Standard
13568 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13569 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13570 \begin_inset Newline newline
13573 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13574 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13577 \begin_layout Standard
13578 To use custom character styles, open the
13580 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13582 \begin_inset space ~
13585 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13588 dialog or press the toolbar button
13591 arg "dialog-show character"
13595 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13596 font property that you can choose.
13597 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13600 \begin_inset space ~
13605 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13610 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13611 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13612 environments all at once.
13615 \begin_layout Standard
13616 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13619 \begin_inset space ~
13631 \begin_layout Labeling
13632 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13646 The possible options are:
13650 \begin_layout Labeling
13651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13656 This is the Roman font family.
13657 Normally a serif font.
13658 It's also the default family.
13668 \begin_layout Labeling
13669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13673 \begin_inset space ~
13680 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13692 \begin_layout Labeling
13693 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13700 This is the Typewriter font family.
13706 arg "font-typewriter"
13715 \begin_layout Labeling
13716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13721 This corresponds to the print weight.
13726 \begin_layout Labeling
13727 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13732 This is the Medium font series.
13733 It's also the default series.
13736 \begin_layout Labeling
13737 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13744 This is the Bold font series.
13757 \begin_layout Labeling
13758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13763 As the name implies.
13768 \begin_layout Labeling
13769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13774 This is the Upright font shape.
13775 It's also the default shape.
13778 \begin_layout Labeling
13779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13793 s the Italic font shape
13799 \begin_layout Labeling
13800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13807 This is the Slanted font shape
13809 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13812 \begin_layout Labeling
13813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13824 This is the Small caps font shape
13831 \begin_layout Labeling
13832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13837 Alters the text color.
13838 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13842 \begin_inset space ~
13847 , which means that the document default color set in
13849 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13850 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13856 \begin_inset space ~
13861 is used, you can choose between
13894 \begin_inset Index idx
13897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13906 \begin_layout Labeling
13907 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13912 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13913 the language of the document.
13914 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13916 \begin_inset Newline newline
13919 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13920 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13921 When using the spell checking (see section
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13928 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13932 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13935 \begin_layout Labeling
13936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13941 Alters the size of the font.
13942 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13943 proportional to the document font size.
13944 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13945 what you want to do.
13950 \begin_layout Labeling
13951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13972 arg "font-size tiny"
13978 \begin_layout Labeling
13979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14000 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14006 \begin_layout Labeling
14007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14028 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14034 \begin_layout Labeling
14035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14056 arg "font-size small"
14062 \begin_layout Labeling
14063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14077 It's also the default size.
14081 arg "font-size normal"
14087 \begin_layout Labeling
14088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14109 arg "font-size large"
14115 \begin_layout Labeling
14116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14137 arg "font-size larger"
14143 \begin_layout Labeling
14144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14165 arg "font-size largest"
14171 \begin_layout Labeling
14172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14193 arg "font-size huge"
14199 \begin_layout Labeling
14200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14221 arg "font-size giant"
14227 \begin_layout Labeling
14228 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14233 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14253 arg "font-size increase"
14259 \begin_layout Labeling
14260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14265 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14285 arg "font-size decrease"
14292 \begin_layout Standard
14297 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14298 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14299 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14300 — use those instead.
14301 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14304 \begin_layout Labeling
14305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14310 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14315 \begin_layout Labeling
14316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14323 This is text with emphasize on
14326 This might seem like the same as
14330 , but it is actually a bit different.
14336 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14338 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14349 This is text with Underbar on.
14355 arg "font-underline"
14361 \begin_inset Newline newline
14366 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14367 when you could not change fonts.
14368 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14369 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14373 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14376 \begin_layout Labeling
14377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14381 \begin_inset space ~
14388 This is text with Double underbar on.
14394 arg "font-underunderline"
14398 \begin_inset Newline newline
14401 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14402 about double underbar.
14405 \begin_layout Labeling
14406 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14410 \begin_inset space ~
14417 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14423 arg "font-underwave"
14427 \begin_inset Newline newline
14430 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14431 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14434 \begin_layout Labeling
14435 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 This is text with Strikeout on.
14448 arg "font-strikeout"
14452 \begin_inset Newline newline
14455 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14456 changed in the meantime.
14459 \begin_layout Labeling
14460 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14467 This is text with Noun on.
14474 , this is a logical attribute.
14475 Normally it's equivalent to
14478 \begin_inset space ~
14487 \begin_layout Standard
14488 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14489 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14491 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14493 \begin_inset space ~
14496 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14502 arg "dialog-show character"
14505 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14506 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14509 arg "textstyle-apply"
14513 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14517 \begin_layout Standard
14518 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14525 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14526 (suppose you just set the shape to
14527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14545 \begin_inset space ~
14557 \begin_layout Standard
14558 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14566 \begin_inset space ~
14578 \begin_layout Itemize
14584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14591 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14609 \begin_inset Newline newline
14613 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14627 \begin_inset Note Note
14630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14631 For more on phantoms see section
14632 \begin_inset space ~
14636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14638 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14648 \begin_inset Newline newline
14654 \begin_layout Itemize
14659 fonts use characters with serifs.
14660 These are the small
14661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14668 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14669 The following example shows the difference:
14670 \begin_inset Newline newline
14674 \begin_inset Newline newline
14679 text without serifs
14682 \begin_inset Newline newline
14685 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14686 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14693 \begin_layout Itemize
14698 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14699 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14700 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14711 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14712 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14715 \begin_inset space ~
14720 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14721 the property to be removed.
14722 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14723 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14724 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14742 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14743 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14751 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14755 \begin_inset space ~
14760 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14771 If you, for example, set
14772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14790 \begin_inset space ~
14795 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14804 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14807 \begin_layout Standard
14808 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14809 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14812 \begin_layout Section
14813 Printing and Previewing
14816 \begin_layout Subsection
14820 \begin_layout Standard
14821 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14822 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14823 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14824 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14825 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14827 Additional Features
14832 \begin_layout Standard
14833 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14834 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14835 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14836 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14837 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14838 This happens in two stages:
14841 \begin_layout Enumerate
14842 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14843 generating a file with the extension,
14844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14858 \begin_layout Enumerate
14859 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14863 file to produce printable output.
14866 \begin_layout Subsection
14867 Output file formats
14868 \begin_inset Index idx
14871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14880 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14888 Simple text (ASCII)
14889 \begin_inset Index idx
14892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14893 File formats ! ASCII
14901 \begin_layout Standard
14902 This file type has the extension
14903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14915 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14919 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14926 \begin_layout Standard
14927 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14929 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14930 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14932 \begin_inset space ~
14938 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14939 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14940 \begin_inset space ~
14944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14946 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14951 If your document includes such material, use
14953 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14954 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14956 \begin_inset space ~
14960 \begin_inset space ~
14964 \begin_inset space ~
14972 \begin_inset space ~
14976 \begin_inset space ~
14982 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14983 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14988 \begin_inset Index idx
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 File formats ! LaTeX
15000 \begin_layout Standard
15001 This file type has the extension
15002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15013 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15015 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15016 it manually with console commands.
15017 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15018 you view or export your document.
15021 \begin_layout Standard
15022 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15024 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15025 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15040 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15041 \begin_inset space ~
15045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15047 reference "sub:Export"
15054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15056 \begin_inset Index idx
15059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 This file type has the extension
15070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15090 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15091 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15092 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15096 \begin_layout Standard
15097 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15098 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15099 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15100 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15101 when you view the DVI.
15102 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15105 \begin_layout Standard
15106 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15108 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15109 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15114 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15115 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15117 \begin_inset space ~
15124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15134 The latter option uses the program
15143 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15144 font access (see section
15145 \begin_inset space ~
15149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15151 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15156 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15157 standard TeX processor.
15160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15162 \begin_inset Index idx
15165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15166 File formats ! PostScript
15174 \begin_layout Standard
15175 This file type has the extension
15176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15188 PostScript was developed by the company
15192 as a printer language.
15193 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15195 PostScript can be seen as a
15196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15199 programming language
15200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15203 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15208 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15214 \begin_inset Index idx
15217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15218 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15228 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15231 \begin_layout Standard
15232 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15236 Encapsulated PostScript
15237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15240 (EPS, file extension
15241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15253 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15254 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15255 If, for example, you have 50
15256 \begin_inset space ~
15259 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15260 \begin_inset space ~
15263 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15264 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15265 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15266 EPS to avoid this problem.
15269 \begin_layout Standard
15270 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15272 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15273 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15281 \begin_inset Index idx
15284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15291 \begin_inset Index idx
15294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15303 \begin_layout Standard
15304 This file type has the extension
15305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 Portable Document Format
15322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15329 was derived from PostScript.
15330 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15339 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15340 looks exactly the same.
15343 \begin_layout Standard
15344 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15352 (JPG, file extension
15353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 Portable Network Graphics
15381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15384 (PNG, file extension
15385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15397 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15398 background to one of these formats.
15399 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15400 will slow down your workflow.
15401 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15404 \begin_layout Standard
15405 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15407 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15413 \begin_layout Description
15415 \begin_inset space ~
15418 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15422 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15425 \begin_layout Description
15427 \begin_inset space ~
15434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15441 X) This uses the program
15445 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15450 is a new engine, derived from
15454 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15455 access (see section
15456 \begin_inset space ~
15460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15462 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15467 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15468 standard TeX processor.
15471 \begin_layout Description
15473 \begin_inset space ~
15480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15487 X) This uses the program
15491 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15496 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15497 font access (see section
15498 \begin_inset space ~
15502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15504 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15509 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15510 vertically written Japanese.
15513 \begin_layout Description
15515 \begin_inset space ~
15518 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15522 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15526 \begin_layout Description
15528 \begin_inset space ~
15531 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15535 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15536 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15540 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15541 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15548 \begin_inset space ~
15557 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15558 works without problems.
15559 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15560 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15564 \begin_inset space ~
15571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15583 \begin_inset space ~
15590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15599 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15607 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15609 \begin_inset Index idx
15612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15613 FileFormats ! XHTML
15619 \begin_inset Index idx
15622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 \begin_layout Standard
15632 This file type has the extension
15633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15645 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15646 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15647 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15648 suitable for the purpose.
15649 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15651 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15652 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15655 between different formats, which are described in section
15657 Math Output in XHTML
15662 \begin_inset space ~
15670 \begin_layout Standard
15671 XHTML output remains
15672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15679 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15682 LyX and the World Wide Web
15686 Additional Features
15688 manual, for more information.
15691 \begin_layout Standard
15692 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15694 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15695 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15701 \begin_layout Subsection
15703 \begin_inset Index idx
15706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15715 \begin_layout Standard
15716 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15717 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15726 or use the toolbar button
15733 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15734 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15741 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15745 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15753 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15758 Further output formats can be selected via
15760 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15761 View (Other Formats)
15763 or the toolbar button
15764 \begin_inset Graphics
15765 filename ../images/view-others.png
15767 groupId toolbarbuttons
15774 \begin_layout Standard
15775 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15776 viewer window using the menu
15778 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15783 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15784 Update (Other Formats)
15789 \begin_layout Standard
15790 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15792 To have a real output, export your document.
15795 \begin_layout Subsection
15796 Printing the File from within LyX
15797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15799 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15806 \begin_layout Standard
15807 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15808 it directly from within LyX.
15809 To print a file, select the menu
15811 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15817 arg "dialog-show print"
15820 ) or click on the toolbar button
15823 arg "dialog-show print"
15827 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15828 This file is then processed by the program
15832 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15837 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15840 \begin_layout Standard
15841 You can set the following print parameters in the
15844 \begin_inset space ~
15852 \begin_layout Labeling
15853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15858 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15863 Note that this printer name is for the program
15872 has to be configured for this printer name.
15873 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15880 reference "sub:Printer"
15889 The printer should understand PostScript.
15892 \begin_layout Labeling
15893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15898 The name of a file to print to.
15899 The output will be a PostScript file.
15900 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15904 \begin_layout Standard
15905 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15906 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15907 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15908 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15909 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15910 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15911 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15914 \begin_layout Section
15915 A few Words about Typography
15916 \begin_inset Index idx
15919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15928 \begin_layout Subsection
15929 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15930 \begin_inset Index idx
15933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15940 \begin_inset Index idx
15943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15952 \begin_layout Standard
15954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15965 character comes in four lengths: the
15977 , and the minus sign:
15978 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15984 \begin_layout Standard
15985 \begin_inset Tabular
15986 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15987 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15988 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15989 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15990 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15991 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16060 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16085 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16087 \begin_inset space ~
16090 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16097 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16122 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16124 \begin_inset space ~
16127 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16148 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16182 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16188 \begin_layout Standard
16189 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16201 character multiple times in a row.
16202 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16203 the final output, but not in LyX.
16205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 \begin_layout Standard
16236 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16237 math mode and has a length of its own.
16238 Here are some examples:
16241 \begin_layout Enumerate
16242 line- and page-breaks
16243 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16253 \begin_layout Enumerate
16255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16265 \begin_layout Enumerate
16266 Oh — there's a dash.
16267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16277 \begin_layout Enumerate
16278 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16282 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16292 \begin_layout Subsection
16294 \begin_inset Index idx
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16306 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16313 \begin_layout Standard
16314 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16315 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16320 \begin_inset Index idx
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16324 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16329 following the rules of the document language.
16332 \begin_layout Standard
16333 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16338 font and with unusual constructs, like
16339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16347 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16349 This is done with the menu
16351 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16352 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16354 \begin_inset space ~
16360 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16361 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16364 \begin_layout Standard
16365 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16366 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16376 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16384 as a hyphenation possibility.
16385 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16386 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16387 as described in section
16388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16391 Prevent Hyphenation
16392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16398 \begin_inset space ~
16406 \begin_layout Subsection
16408 \begin_inset Index idx
16411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16421 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16424 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16431 \begin_layout Standard
16432 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16433 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16434 LaTeX then adds the
16435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16438 appropriate amount of space.
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16442 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16444 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16445 gets after another word.
16448 \begin_layout Standard
16449 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16450 not work in all cases.
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16464 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16467 \begin_layout Standard
16468 Here are some examples of
16472 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16475 \begin_layout Itemize
16480 \begin_layout Itemize
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16489 \begin_layout Itemize
16491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16495 this is too much space!
16498 \begin_layout Itemize
16503 \begin_layout Standard
16504 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16507 \begin_layout Standard
16508 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16511 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 \begin_inset space ~
16520 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16521 \begin_inset space ~
16525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16527 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16532 \begin_inset Index idx
16535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16536 Spaces ! inter-word
16544 \begin_layout Enumerate
16548 \begin_inset space ~
16553 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16554 \begin_inset space ~
16558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16560 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16565 \begin_inset Index idx
16568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16577 \begin_layout Enumerate
16581 \begin_inset space ~
16585 \begin_inset space ~
16589 \begin_inset space ~
16596 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16598 \begin_inset space ~
16603 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16604 This function is also bound to
16607 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16613 \begin_layout Standard
16614 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16617 \begin_layout Itemize
16619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16623 \begin_inset space \space{}
16626 this is too much space!
16629 \begin_layout Itemize
16630 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16634 \begin_layout Standard
16635 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16636 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16637 will take care of this.
16640 \begin_layout Standard
16641 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16645 \begin_inset space ~
16650 feature described in the section
16656 Additional Features
16661 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16663 \begin_inset Index idx
16666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16667 Typography ! Quotes
16673 \begin_inset Index idx
16676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16707 \begin_layout Standard
16708 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16709 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16710 and use a closing quote at the end.
16712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16720 The keyboard character,
16724 , generates this automatically.
16727 \begin_layout Standard
16728 You can specify what character the
16732 key produces using the submenu
16738 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16742 \begin_inset Index idx
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 Document ! Settings
16756 There are six choices:
16759 \begin_layout Labeling
16760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16783 \begin_layout Labeling
16784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16787 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16791 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16797 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16801 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16807 \begin_layout Labeling
16808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16811 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16815 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16821 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16825 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16831 \begin_layout Labeling
16832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16835 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16845 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16849 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16855 \begin_layout Labeling
16856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16859 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16863 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16869 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16873 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16879 \begin_layout Labeling
16880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16883 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16887 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16893 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16897 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16903 \begin_layout Standard
16904 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16907 arg "quote-insert single"
16913 \begin_layout Subsection
16915 \begin_inset Index idx
16918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16919 Typography ! Ligatures
16925 \begin_inset Index idx
16928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16959 name "sub:Ligatures"
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16967 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16968 print them as single characters.
16969 These groups are known as
16974 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16976 Here are the standard ligatures:
16979 \begin_layout Itemize
16983 \begin_layout Itemize
16987 \begin_layout Itemize
16991 \begin_layout Itemize
16995 \begin_layout Itemize
16999 \begin_layout Standard
17000 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17003 \begin_layout Standard
17004 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17005 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17013 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17029 To break a ligature, use
17031 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17032 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17034 \begin_inset space ~
17041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17052 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17069 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17077 \begin_layout Subsection
17079 \begin_inset Index idx
17082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17091 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17098 \begin_layout Standard
17099 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17100 characters in different sizes and positions.
17101 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17102 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17122 \begin_inset Note Note
17125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17126 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17127 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17132 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17133 following proper names:
17136 \begin_layout Description
17137 LyX The name of the game, write
17138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17159 \begin_layout Description
17160 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17182 \begin_layout Description
17183 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17205 \begin_layout Description
17206 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17228 \begin_layout Standard
17229 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17234 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17242 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17243 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17244 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17247 : The actual version is
17248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17255 , the previous one was
17256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 \begin_layout Standard
17267 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17268 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17269 In LyX this will look like
17270 \begin_inset Graphics
17271 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17277 \begin_inset Newline newline
17280 For more about TeX Code, see section
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17287 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17294 \begin_layout Subsection
17296 \begin_inset Index idx
17299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17308 \begin_layout Standard
17309 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17310 space between two words.
17311 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17321 for units use the menu
17323 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17324 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17326 \begin_inset space ~
17334 arg "space-insert thin"
17340 \begin_layout Standard
17341 Here is an example to show the differences:
17344 \begin_layout Standard
17345 \begin_inset Tabular
17346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17347 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17348 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17356 \begin_inset space ~
17360 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17372 space between number and unit
17379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17388 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17400 half space between number and unit
17413 \begin_layout Subsection
17415 \begin_inset Index idx
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17419 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17427 \begin_layout Standard
17428 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17430 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17431 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17432 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17433 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17434 These bits of text became known as
17445 \begin_layout Standard
17446 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17447 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17448 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17449 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17450 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17451 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17452 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17453 \begin_inset Newline newline
17461 \begin_inset Newline newline
17469 \begin_inset Newline newline
17472 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17473 Some LaTeX books (such as
17474 \begin_inset space ~
17478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17480 key "latexcompanion"
17485 \begin_inset space ~
17489 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17495 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17499 \begin_layout Chapter
17500 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17503 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17510 \begin_layout Standard
17511 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17520 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17523 \begin_layout Section
17525 \begin_inset Index idx
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17544 \begin_layout Standard
17545 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17548 \begin_layout Description
17550 \begin_inset space ~
17553 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17554 \begin_inset Newline newline
17558 \begin_inset Note Note
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17562 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17570 \begin_layout Description
17571 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17572 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17574 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17575 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17588 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Newline newline
17598 \begin_inset Note Comment
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17602 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17610 \begin_layout Description
17612 \begin_inset space ~
17615 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17616 set in the document settings under
17618 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17620 \begin_inset space ~
17626 \begin_inset Newline newline
17630 \begin_inset Newline newline
17634 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17643 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17644 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17649 of a comment that appears in the output.
17655 \begin_inset Newline newline
17659 \begin_inset Newline newline
17662 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17665 \begin_layout Standard
17666 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17674 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17678 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17681 \begin_layout Section
17683 \begin_inset Index idx
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17695 name "sec:Footnotes"
17702 \begin_layout Standard
17703 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17706 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17709 or the toolbar button
17712 arg "footnote-insert"
17724 \begin_inset Graphics
17725 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17734 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17763 label, the box will
17767 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17768 Clicking on the box label again will close
17781 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17782 and click on the footnote
17797 \begin_layout Standard
17798 Here is an example footnote:
17806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17807 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17815 \begin_layout Standard
17816 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17817 position where the footnote box is placed.
17818 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17819 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17820 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17821 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17826 ey are described in the
17829 \begin_inset space ~
17837 \begin_layout Section
17839 \begin_inset Index idx
17842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17851 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17858 \begin_layout Standard
17859 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17860 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17862 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17864 \begin_inset space ~
17869 or the toolbar button
17872 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17898 appearing within your text.
17899 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17908 \begin_layout Standard
17909 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17913 \begin_inset Marginal
17916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17918 This is a marginal note.
17926 \begin_layout Standard
17927 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17928 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17929 pages, right on odd pages.
17932 \begin_layout Standard
17933 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17936 \begin_inset space ~
17944 \begin_inset space ~
17952 \begin_layout Section
17953 Graphics and Images
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 \begin_inset Index idx
17967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17976 name "sec:Graphics"
17983 \begin_layout Standard
17984 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17985 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17988 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17993 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17997 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18000 \begin_layout Standard
18001 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18006 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18007 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18009 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18010 \begin_inset space ~
18014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18016 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18023 \begin_layout Standard
18028 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18029 of the image in the output.
18030 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18038 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset space ~
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18060 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18061 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18084 \begin_inset space ~
18088 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18105 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18109 \begin_inset space ~
18114 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18115 with the image size is printed.
18119 \begin_inset space ~
18123 \begin_inset space ~
18127 \begin_inset space ~
18132 is explained in the
18135 \begin_inset space ~
18147 \begin_layout Standard
18148 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18149 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18151 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18154 \begin_layout Standard
18156 \begin_inset Graphics
18157 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18165 \begin_layout Standard
18166 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18167 the image into a float, see section
18168 \begin_inset space ~
18172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18174 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18181 \begin_layout Subsection
18183 \begin_inset Index idx
18186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18195 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18202 \begin_layout Standard
18203 You can insert images in any known file format.
18204 But as we explained in section
18205 \begin_inset space ~
18209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18211 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18215 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18216 LyX therefore uses the program
18220 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18221 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18222 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18229 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18237 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18240 \begin_layout Description
18242 \begin_inset space ~
18245 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18246 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18247 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18251 Graphics Interchange Format
18252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18255 (GIF, file extension
18256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18268 \begin_inset Index idx
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18303 Portable Network Graphics
18304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18307 (PNG, file extension
18308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18320 \begin_inset Index idx
18323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 (JPG, file extension
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18384 \begin_inset Index idx
18387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18418 \begin_layout Description
18420 \begin_inset space ~
18423 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18425 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18426 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18427 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18428 \begin_inset Newline newline
18431 Scalable image formats can be
18432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18435 Scalable Vector Graphics
18436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18439 (SVG, file extension
18440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18452 \begin_inset Index idx
18455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18487 Encapsulated PostScript
18488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18491 (EPS, file extension
18492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18504 \begin_inset Index idx
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18539 Portable Document Format
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 (PDF, file extension
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18556 \begin_inset Index idx
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18574 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18575 result will not be scalable.
18576 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18598 \begin_layout Subsection
18599 Grouping of Image Settings
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18604 Images ! Settings grouping
18612 \begin_layout Standard
18613 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18615 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18616 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18618 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18619 need to manually change each of them.
18623 \begin_layout Standard
18624 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18627 \begin_inset space ~
18631 \begin_inset space ~
18646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18654 \begin_inset space ~
18658 \begin_inset space ~
18665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18675 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18676 and checking the name of the desired group.
18679 \begin_layout Section
18681 \begin_inset Index idx
18684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18700 \begin_layout Standard
18701 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18704 arg "tabular-insert"
18709 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18713 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18714 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18715 from the rest of the table.
18716 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18717 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18719 Here is an example table:
18722 \begin_layout Standard
18724 \begin_inset Tabular
18725 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18726 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18727 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18728 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18729 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18730 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 \begin_layout Subsection
18934 \begin_layout Standard
18935 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18938 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18942 This brings up the table dialog.
18943 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18944 cursor is placed currently.
18945 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18946 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18947 done on all of your selection.
18950 \begin_layout Standard
18951 In addition to the table dialog, the
18954 \begin_inset space ~
18959 helps you in setting table properties.
18960 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18963 \begin_layout Standard
18967 \begin_inset space ~
18972 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18973 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18974 current cell respectively.
18975 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18977 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18978 of text, see section
18979 \begin_inset space ~
18983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18985 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18992 \begin_layout Standard
18993 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18994 using the check box
19003 This will merge the cells to
19007 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19008 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19009 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19010 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19011 in the last row without the upper border:
19014 \begin_layout Standard
19016 \begin_inset Tabular
19017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19018 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19020 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19021 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19022 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19042 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 \begin_layout Standard
19154 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19155 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19156 explained in the chapter
19163 \begin_inset space ~
19169 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
19170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19173 degrees counterclockwise.
19174 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19177 \begin_layout Standard
19178 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19186 Most DVI-viewers are
19190 able to display rotations.
19198 \begin_layout Standard
19203 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19208 adds lines for all cell borders.
19211 \begin_layout Subsection
19213 \begin_inset Index idx
19216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19217 Tables ! Longtables
19223 \begin_inset Index idx
19226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 \begin_layout Standard
19236 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19243 \begin_inset space ~
19252 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19253 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19256 \begin_layout Description
19261 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19262 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19263 except for the first page, if
19266 \begin_inset space ~
19274 \begin_layout Description
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19283 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19284 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19287 \begin_layout Description
19292 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19293 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19294 except for the last page, if
19297 \begin_inset space ~
19305 \begin_layout Description
19309 \begin_inset space ~
19314 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19315 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19318 \begin_layout Description
19319 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19320 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19322 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19326 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19329 \begin_inset space ~
19337 \begin_layout Standard
19338 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19339 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19340 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19346 In this context, first means first in this order:
19349 \begin_inset space ~
19361 \begin_inset space ~
19366 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19369 \begin_layout Standard
19371 \begin_inset Tabular
19372 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19373 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19374 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19375 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19376 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19377 <row endfirsthead="true">
19378 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19389 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19398 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19408 <row endfirsthead="true">
19409 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19420 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19429 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 <row endhead="true">
19442 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19453 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19462 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <row endhead="true">
19473 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19493 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <row endfoot="true">
19506 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20589 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <row endlastfoot="true">
21488 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 \begin_layout Subsection
21527 \begin_inset Index idx
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21539 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21546 \begin_layout Standard
21547 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21548 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21549 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21550 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21554 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21557 \begin_layout Standard
21558 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21559 for the column in the table dialog.
21560 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21561 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21565 \begin_layout Standard
21567 \begin_inset Tabular
21568 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21569 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21571 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 This is longer now.
21722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21774 This is longer now.
21779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21805 \begin_layout Standard
21806 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21807 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21812 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21813 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21819 Selection with the mouse or with
21823 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21824 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21825 the selection from outside the table.
21828 \begin_layout Section
21830 \begin_inset Index idx
21833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21849 \begin_layout Subsection
21853 \begin_layout Standard
21854 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21855 have a fixed location.
21857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21864 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21872 \begin_inset space ~
21877 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21878 too many notes on the current page.
21881 \begin_layout Standard
21882 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21883 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21884 and pages without text.
21885 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21886 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21887 Floats are therefore numbered.
21888 Referencing is described in section
21889 \begin_inset space ~
21893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21895 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21902 \begin_layout Standard
21903 To insert a float, use the menu
21905 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21909 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21910 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21912 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21913 \begin_inset Index idx
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21923 paragraph within the float.
21924 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21925 by left-clicking on the box label.
21926 A closed float box looks like this:
21927 \begin_inset Graphics
21928 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21933 – a gray button with a red label.
21936 \begin_layout Standard
21937 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21938 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21941 \begin_layout Subsection
21943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21945 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21950 \begin_inset Index idx
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 Floats ! Figure floats
21962 \begin_layout Standard
21964 \begin_inset space ~
21968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21970 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21974 was created using the menu
21976 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21977 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21983 arg "float-insert figure"
21987 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21990 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21996 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22000 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22001 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22003 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22005 \begin_inset space ~
22013 arg "layout-paragraph"
22019 \begin_layout Standard
22020 \begin_inset Float figure
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 \begin_inset Graphics
22028 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22043 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22047 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22060 \begin_layout Standard
22061 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22062 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22064 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22073 ) and refer to it using the menu
22075 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22081 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22085 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22086 vague references like
22087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22094 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22104 For more about cross-references, see section
22105 \begin_inset space ~
22109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22111 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22118 \begin_layout Standard
22119 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22120 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22121 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22122 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22123 as described in section
22124 \begin_inset space ~
22128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22130 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22136 \begin_inset space ~
22140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22142 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22146 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22147 You can also set the images one below the other.
22149 \begin_inset space ~
22153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22155 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22162 reference "fig:Platypus"
22166 are the subfigures.
22169 \begin_layout Standard
22170 \begin_inset Float figure
22175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22180 \begin_inset Float figure
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22191 name "fig:Undefinable"
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 \begin_inset Graphics
22205 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22216 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22220 \begin_inset Float figure
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22231 name "fig:Platypus"
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 \begin_inset Graphics
22245 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22257 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22269 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22273 Two distorted images.
22286 \begin_layout Subsection
22288 \begin_inset Index idx
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 Floats ! Table floats
22300 \begin_layout Standard
22301 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22303 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22304 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22307 or the toolbar button
22310 arg "float-insert table"
22314 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22315 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22316 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22318 \begin_inset space ~
22322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22324 reference "tab:Table-float"
22331 \begin_layout Standard
22332 \begin_inset Float table
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22343 name "tab:Table-float"
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 \begin_inset Tabular
22358 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22359 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22360 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22361 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22362 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22513 \end{array}\right]$
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22555 \begin_layout Subsection
22557 \begin_inset Index idx
22560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22569 \begin_layout Standard
22570 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22571 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22572 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22574 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22582 \begin_inset space ~
22590 \begin_layout Section
22592 \begin_inset Index idx
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 \begin_layout Standard
22605 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22607 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22608 \begin_inset space \space{}
22615 \begin_layout Standard
22616 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22618 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22622 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22623 and its alignment within the page.
22626 \begin_layout Standard
22628 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22638 height_special "totalheight"
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 This is a minipage.
22645 The text is set in an italic style.
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22651 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22652 another formatting.
22660 \begin_layout Standard
22661 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22664 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22668 as described in section
22669 \begin_inset space ~
22673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22675 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22680 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22686 \begin_layout Standard
22687 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22697 height_special "totalheight"
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22702 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22708 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22712 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22722 height_special "totalheight"
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22727 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22735 \begin_layout Standard
22736 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22742 \begin_layout Standard
22743 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22745 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22752 \begin_inset space ~
22760 \begin_layout Chapter
22761 Mathematical Formulas
22762 \begin_inset Index idx
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 \begin_inset Index idx
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22806 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22813 \begin_layout Standard
22814 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22819 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22822 \begin_layout Section
22824 \begin_inset Index idx
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22836 \begin_layout Standard
22837 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22850 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22852 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22853 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22854 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22856 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22862 \begin_layout Standard
22863 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22867 \begin_inset space ~
22872 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22875 \begin_layout Standard
22876 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22877 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22880 \begin_layout Standard
22881 This is a line with an inline formula
22882 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22888 \begin_layout Standard
22889 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22890 paragraph, like this one:
22891 \begin_inset Formula
22898 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22901 \begin_layout Standard
22902 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22903 For example, typing
22904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22917 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22918 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22922 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22925 \begin_inset space ~
22933 \begin_layout Subsection
22934 Navigating in Formulas
22935 \begin_inset Index idx
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22947 \begin_layout Standard
22948 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22949 achieved with the arrow keys.
22950 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22951 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22956 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22957 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22961 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22965 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22968 \end{array}\right]$
22976 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22981 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22982 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22990 , printed in this document as
22991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22995 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23002 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23003 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23004 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23009 For example, if you want
23010 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23018 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23028 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23032 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23037 , since in the latter case only the
23040 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23045 will be under the square root sign:
23046 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23052 \begin_layout Standard
23053 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23055 \begin_inset Formula
23057 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23066 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23067 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23070 \begin_layout Subsection
23074 \begin_layout Standard
23075 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23076 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23080 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23081 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23082 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23083 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23084 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23087 \begin_layout Subsection
23088 Exponents and Subscripts
23089 \begin_inset Index idx
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 \begin_inset Index idx
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 \begin_layout Standard
23112 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23115 arg "math-superscript"
23121 arg "math-subscript"
23124 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23126 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23129 , type in a formula
23132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23142 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23148 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23152 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23158 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23164 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23173 , you have to use an extra
23177 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23178 For example, if you want
23179 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23185 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23191 Subscripts are similar: To get
23192 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23198 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23206 \begin_layout Subsection
23208 \begin_inset Index idx
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 \begin_layout Standard
23221 Create a fraction either with the command
23227 or by using the icon
23230 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23236 \begin_inset space ~
23242 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23243 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23244 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23249 To move back up, press
23254 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23255 \begin_inset Formula
23257 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23260 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23268 \begin_layout Subsection
23270 \begin_inset Index idx
23273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 \begin_layout Standard
23283 Roots can be created using the
23286 \begin_inset space ~
23294 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23300 arg "math-insert \\root"
23322 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23328 always produces a square root.
23331 \begin_layout Subsection
23332 Operators with Limits
23333 \begin_inset Index idx
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 \begin_inset Index idx
23346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23355 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23362 \begin_layout Standard
23364 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23368 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23371 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23372 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23373 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23374 The sum operator will automatically place its
23375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23382 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23384 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23388 \begin_inset Formula
23390 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23395 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23399 \begin_layout Standard
23400 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23402 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23403 behind the operator and using the menu
23405 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23406 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23408 \begin_inset space ~
23412 \begin_inset space ~
23426 \begin_layout Standard
23427 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23436 \begin_inset Index idx
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23446 \begin_inset Formula
23448 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23453 which will place the
23454 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23466 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23467 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23473 \begin_layout Standard
23474 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23481 Have a look at section
23482 \begin_inset space ~
23486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23488 reference "sub:Functions"
23492 for an explanation of function macros.
23495 \begin_layout Subsection
23497 \begin_inset Index idx
23500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 \begin_layout Standard
23510 Most math symbols can be found in the
23513 \begin_inset space ~
23518 under one of several categories; including
23535 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23539 \begin_layout Standard
23540 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23541 you don't have to use the
23544 \begin_inset space ~
23549 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23550 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23553 \begin_layout Subsection
23555 \begin_inset Index idx
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 \begin_layout Standard
23568 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23573 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23579 \begin_inset space ~
23587 arg "math-insert \\space"
23591 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23592 For example, the sequence
23597 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23601 \begin_inset Graphics
23602 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23607 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23608 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23609 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23610 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23612 Here are two examples:
23615 \begin_layout Standard
23625 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23631 \begin_layout Standard
23641 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23647 \begin_layout Subsection
23649 \begin_inset Index idx
23652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23661 name "sub:Functions"
23668 \begin_layout Standard
23672 \begin_inset space ~
23677 contains under the button
23680 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23683 a number of function macros, such as
23684 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23688 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23696 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23703 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23704 avoid confusions, because
23705 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23709 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23715 \begin_layout Standard
23716 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23718 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23722 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23728 \begin_layout Standard
23729 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23730 are placed, as described in section
23731 \begin_inset space ~
23735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23737 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23744 \begin_layout Subsection
23746 \begin_inset Index idx
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 \begin_layout Standard
23759 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23761 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23762 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23763 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23766 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23767 Our example is entered by typing
23772 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23779 \begin_inset space ~
23783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23785 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23789 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23792 \begin_layout Standard
23793 \begin_inset Float table
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23804 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23808 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 \begin_inset Tabular
23819 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23820 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23823 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24384 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24405 \begin_layout Standard
24406 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24409 \begin_inset space ~
24417 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24420 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24424 \begin_layout Section
24425 Brackets and Delimiters
24426 \begin_inset Index idx
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24436 \begin_inset Index idx
24439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24448 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24455 \begin_layout Standard
24456 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24457 For some purposes, using just the keys
24462 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24463 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24464 toolbar delimiter icon
24467 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24471 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24472 \begin_inset Formula
24474 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24482 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24483 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24487 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24490 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24496 \begin_inset Formula
24498 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24506 \begin_layout Standard
24507 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24508 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24512 \begin_layout Standard
24513 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24514 left side and right side.
24515 If you use the option
24518 \begin_inset space ~
24523 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24524 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24525 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24530 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24533 \begin_layout Standard
24534 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24535 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24536 is to go inside the brackets.
24537 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24542 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24543 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24544 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24548 arg "math-delim ( )"
24554 \begin_layout Section
24555 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24556 \begin_inset Index idx
24559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 \begin_inset Index idx
24569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 \begin_inset Index idx
24579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24580 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24588 \begin_layout Standard
24589 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24592 \begin_inset space ~
24600 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24604 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24605 Here is an example:
24606 \begin_inset Formula
24608 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24617 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24618 \begin_inset space ~
24622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24624 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24629 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24630 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24631 This alignment is set in the box
24636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24684 for every column as default.
24685 For example, the sequence
24686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24697 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24698 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24699 corresponds to the relevant column.
24700 The result will look like this:
24701 \begin_inset Formula
24704 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24705 column & has & has\, right\\
24706 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24715 \begin_layout Standard
24716 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24719 arg "newline-insert newline"
24722 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24723 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24725 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24728 or the math toolbar.
24731 \begin_layout Standard
24732 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24733 It can be created with the menu
24735 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24736 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24750 Here is an example:
24751 \begin_inset Formula
24765 \begin_layout Standard
24766 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24769 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24772 arg "newline-insert newline"
24776 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24781 arg "newline-insert newline"
24784 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24792 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24793 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24794 A new row is created by every further entry of
24797 arg "newline-insert newline"
24801 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24802 Here is an example:
24803 \begin_inset Formula
24805 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24806 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24811 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24812 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24813 \begin_inset Formula
24815 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24823 \begin_layout Standard
24824 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24831 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24832 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24835 reference "eq:asquared"
24840 The other types are described in section
24841 \begin_inset space ~
24845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24847 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24854 \begin_layout Section
24855 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24856 \begin_inset Index idx
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24860 Math ! Formula numbering
24866 \begin_inset Index idx
24869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 Math ! Referencing formulas
24876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24878 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24885 \begin_layout Standard
24886 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24888 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24889 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24891 \begin_inset space ~
24895 \begin_inset space ~
24903 arg "math-number-toggle"
24907 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24908 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24909 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24910 the document class.
24911 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24912 separated by a dot:
24913 \begin_inset Formula
24923 arg "math-number-toggle"
24926 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24927 You can only number displayed formulas.
24930 \begin_layout Standard
24931 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24933 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24934 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24936 \begin_inset space ~
24940 \begin_inset space ~
24948 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24951 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24952 \begin_inset Formula
24955 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24961 To number all lines use the shortcut
24964 arg "math-number-toggle"
24970 \begin_layout Standard
24971 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24974 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24975 A label is inserted with the menu
24977 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24986 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24987 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24988 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25000 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25001 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25002 We inserted in the following example the label
25003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25010 in the second line:
25011 \begin_inset Formula
25013 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25014 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25019 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25020 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25021 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25023 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25025 \begin_inset space ~
25033 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25037 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25038 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25039 as the formula number:
25042 \begin_layout Standard
25043 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25046 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25053 \begin_layout Standard
25054 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25055 \begin_inset space ~
25059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25061 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25066 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25074 \begin_layout Section
25075 User defined math macros
25076 \begin_inset Index idx
25079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25088 \begin_layout Standard
25089 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25090 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25091 Math macros are explained in section
25094 \begin_inset space ~
25106 \begin_layout Section
25110 \begin_layout Subsection
25112 \begin_inset Index idx
25115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 \begin_layout Standard
25125 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25126 To set a font in a formula, use the
25129 \begin_inset space ~
25137 arg "math-insert \\font"
25140 , or enter its command, listed in table
25141 \begin_inset space ~
25145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25147 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25154 \begin_layout Standard
25155 \begin_inset Float table
25160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25161 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25166 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25170 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25180 \begin_inset Tabular
25181 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25182 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25183 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25184 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25243 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25270 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25303 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25357 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 \begin_layout Standard
25453 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25461 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25477 \begin_layout Standard
25478 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25479 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25484 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25485 space when you need a space in the box.
25486 Here is an example where
25487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25498 denotes the set of numbers:
25499 \begin_inset Formula
25501 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25509 \begin_layout Standard
25510 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25511 You can, for example, put a character in
25520 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25524 \begin_inset Newline newline
25527 So it is better not to use this feature.
25530 \begin_layout Standard
25531 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25532 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25536 \begin_inset Newline newline
25539 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25545 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25546 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25552 \begin_layout Standard
25559 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25562 \begin_layout Standard
25563 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25565 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25566 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25568 \begin_inset space ~
25576 \begin_layout Subsection
25578 \begin_inset Index idx
25581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25590 \begin_layout Standard
25591 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25593 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25597 \begin_inset space ~
25601 \begin_inset space ~
25609 \begin_inset space ~
25617 arg "math-insert \\font"
25621 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25622 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25623 Here is an example:
25624 \begin_inset Formula
25627 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25628 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25637 \begin_layout Subsection
25639 \begin_inset Index idx
25642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25651 \begin_layout Standard
25652 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25653 automatically chosen in most situations.
25671 For most characters,
25679 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25680 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25685 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25686 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25688 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25691 arg "math-insert \\style"
25695 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25696 For example, you can set
25697 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25700 , which is normally in
25709 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25713 The four styles are used in the following example:
25716 \begin_layout Standard
25717 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25721 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25725 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25729 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25735 \begin_layout Standard
25736 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25737 is set in a particular size with the menu
25739 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25741 \begin_inset space ~
25746 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25747 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25748 will be adjusted to correspond.
25749 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25760 \begin_layout Standard
25764 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25770 \begin_layout Section
25772 \begin_inset Index idx
25775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 \begin_inset Index idx
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25794 \begin_layout Standard
25795 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25796 (AMS) that are in common use.
25799 \begin_layout Subsection
25800 Enabling AMS-Support
25803 \begin_layout Standard
25804 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25805 the document by selecting the checkbox
25808 \begin_inset space ~
25812 \begin_inset space ~
25816 \begin_inset space ~
25823 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25827 \begin_inset Index idx
25830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25831 Document ! Settings
25839 \begin_inset space ~
25845 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25846 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25849 \begin_layout Subsection
25851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25853 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25858 \begin_inset Index idx
25861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25862 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25871 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25872 LyX allows you to choose between
25893 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25894 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25900 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25903 \begin_layout Chapter
25907 \begin_layout Section
25909 \begin_inset Index idx
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25921 name "sec:Cross-References"
25928 \begin_layout Standard
25929 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25930 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25932 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25933 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25934 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25937 \begin_layout Enumerate
25941 \begin_layout Enumerate
25942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25944 name "enu:Second-item"
25951 \begin_layout Enumerate
25955 \begin_layout Standard
25956 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25958 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25961 or by pressing the toolbar button
25968 A gray label box like this:
25969 \begin_inset Graphics
25970 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25975 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25976 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26011 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26012 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26028 \begin_layout Standard
26029 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26031 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26034 or the toolbar button
26037 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26041 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26042 \begin_inset Graphics
26043 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26048 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26050 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26063 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26067 \begin_layout Standard
26068 As an alternative to
26070 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26073 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26078 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26079 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26081 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26093 \begin_layout Standard
26094 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26095 \begin_inset space ~
26099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26101 reference "enu:Second-item"
26108 \begin_layout Standard
26109 It is recommended to use a protected space
26113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26114 described in section
26115 \begin_inset space ~
26119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26121 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26130 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26131 line breaks between them.
26134 \begin_layout Standard
26135 There are six formats of cross-references:
26138 \begin_layout Description
26139 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26142 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26149 \begin_layout Description
26150 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26151 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26163 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26170 \begin_layout Description
26171 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26172 \begin_inset space ~
26176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26177 LatexCommand pageref
26178 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26185 \begin_layout Description
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26191 \begin_inset space ~
26194 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26196 LatexCommand vpageref
26197 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26202 \begin_inset Newline newline
26205 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26206 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26207 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26208 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26209 it prints “on the next page”.
26210 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26213 \begin_layout Description
26215 \begin_inset space ~
26219 \begin_inset space ~
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26226 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26229 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26234 \begin_inset Newline newline
26237 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26243 ; otherwise it behaves like
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_layout Description
26262 \begin_inset space ~
26265 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26266 \begin_inset Newline newline
26270 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26278 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26287 \begin_inset Index idx
26290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26297 \begin_inset Index idx
26300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26301 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26312 \begin_inset Newline newline
26315 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26318 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26322 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26323 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26331 is the default and preferred because
26335 supports only English documents.
26336 The format is specified by using the command
26348 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26349 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26362 ) can be done with this command
26363 \begin_inset Newline newline
26370 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26375 \begin_inset Newline newline
26378 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26380 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26382 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26389 \begin_layout Description
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26394 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26396 LatexCommand nameref
26397 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26404 \begin_layout Standard
26405 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26406 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26407 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26411 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26415 \begin_layout Standard
26416 You can only use the style
26420 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26424 is always possible.
26427 \begin_layout Standard
26428 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26429 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26431 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26432 \begin_inset space ~
26436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26438 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26445 \begin_layout Standard
26446 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26450 \begin_inset space ~
26454 \begin_inset space ~
26459 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26460 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26463 \begin_inset space ~
26468 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26469 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26472 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26478 \begin_layout Standard
26479 You can change labels at any time.
26480 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26481 do not need to think about this.
26484 \begin_layout Standard
26485 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26486 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26487 instead of the reference.
26490 \begin_layout Standard
26491 References are described in detail in the section
26492 \begin_inset space ~
26496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26506 \begin_inset space ~
26514 \begin_layout Section
26515 Table of Contents and other Listings
26516 \begin_inset Index idx
26519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26526 \begin_inset Index idx
26529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26545 \begin_layout Subsection
26547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26549 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26556 \begin_layout Standard
26557 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26559 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26560 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26562 \begin_inset space ~
26566 \begin_inset space ~
26572 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26573 If you click on it, the
26577 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26578 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26579 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26581 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26583 \begin_inset space ~
26588 that is described in section
26589 \begin_inset space ~
26593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26595 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26602 \begin_layout Standard
26603 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26604 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26606 \begin_inset space ~
26610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26612 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26616 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26618 \begin_inset space ~
26622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26624 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26628 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26630 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26633 \begin_layout Subsection
26634 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26637 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26644 \begin_layout Standard
26645 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26647 You can insert them via the
26649 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26653 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26656 \begin_layout Section
26657 URLs and Hyperlinks
26658 \begin_inset Index idx
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26668 \begin_inset Index idx
26671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 \begin_layout Subsection
26682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26691 \begin_layout Standard
26692 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26694 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26702 \begin_inset Flex URL
26705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26715 \begin_layout Standard
26716 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26722 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26726 \begin_layout Standard
26727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26735 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26743 \begin_layout Subsection
26745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26747 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26754 \begin_layout Standard
26755 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26757 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26760 or with the toolbar button
26767 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26776 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26777 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26780 name "LyX's homepage"
26781 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26785 , an Email address like this:
26786 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26788 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26789 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26794 , or a link to a file.
26797 \begin_layout Standard
26798 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26811 to the link target.
26814 \begin_layout Standard
26815 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26816 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26817 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26818 the text style dialog.
26819 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26825 name "LyX's homepage"
26826 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26833 \begin_layout Standard
26834 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26838 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26840 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26841 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26845 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26847 \begin_inset Newline newline
26855 \begin_inset Newline newline
26862 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26865 \begin_layout Section
26867 \begin_inset Index idx
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26879 name "sec:Appendices"
26886 \begin_layout Standard
26887 Appendices are created with the menu
26889 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26891 \begin_inset space ~
26895 \begin_inset space ~
26901 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26902 as the appendix part of the book.
26903 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26906 \begin_layout Standard
26907 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26908 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26909 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26910 and the subsection number.
26911 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26917 \begin_inset space ~
26921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26923 reference "chap:Credits"
26928 \begin_inset space ~
26932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26934 reference "sub:Export"
26941 \begin_layout Section
26943 \begin_inset Index idx
26946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26955 name "sec:Bibliography"
26962 \begin_layout Standard
26963 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26964 You can include a bibliography database,
26968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26969 Known under the name
26970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26982 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26983 manually, using the paragraph environment
26987 , which was described in section
26988 \begin_inset space ~
26992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26994 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26999 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27000 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27004 use a bibliography database.
27007 \begin_layout Subsection
27008 The Bibliography Environment
27011 \begin_layout Standard
27016 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27018 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27027 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27029 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27038 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27041 \begin_layout Standard
27042 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27044 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27047 or the toolbar button
27050 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27054 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27055 containing the available citations.
27056 Select one or more keys from the list and
27066 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27067 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27071 \begin_layout Standard
27072 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27073 entry with surrounding brackets.
27078 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27079 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27091 \begin_layout Standard
27094 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27097 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27099 key "latexcompanion"
27106 \begin_layout Standard
27107 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27117 \begin_layout Standard
27118 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27121 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27123 \begin_inset space ~
27131 arg "layout-paragraph"
27135 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27138 \begin_layout Subsection
27139 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27140 \begin_inset Index idx
27143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27144 Bibliography ! Databases
27150 \begin_inset Index idx
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27154 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27162 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27169 \begin_layout Standard
27170 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27176 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27178 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27179 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27184 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27186 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27187 your working field in a database.
27188 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27189 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27190 list for that document.
27191 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27195 \begin_layout Standard
27196 The database is a text file with the file extension
27197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27208 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27209 The format is explained in
27210 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27216 and in the LaTeX books (
27217 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27219 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27224 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27225 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27226 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27227 \begin_inset Flex URL
27230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27232 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27240 \begin_layout Standard
27241 To use a database, use the menu
27243 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27248 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27261 \begin_inset space ~
27267 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27268 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27275 Add bibliography to TOC
27277 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27282 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27283 in the document or just the cited references.
27286 \begin_layout Standard
27287 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27299 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27300 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27301 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27303 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27309 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27310 \begin_inset Newline newline
27314 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27316 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27328 \begin_layout Standard
27329 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27332 \begin_layout Standard
27333 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27334 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27340 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27341 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27346 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27347 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27348 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27363 The following variants are possible:
27366 \begin_layout Description
27367 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27368 with other bibliography packages (e.
27369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27373 \begin_inset space \space{}
27380 ), only with the package
27384 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27388 \begin_layout Description
27389 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27390 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27391 with all bibliography packages, except
27396 \begin_layout Description
27397 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27402 , works with all bibliography packages
27405 \begin_layout Standard
27406 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27408 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27414 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27423 \begin_layout Standard
27424 When you select the option
27426 Sectioned bibliography
27430 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27431 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27434 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27435 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27437 Customizing Bibliographies
27445 Additional Features
27450 \begin_layout Standard
27451 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27452 the two methods of creating them.
27453 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27454 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27455 We used the style file
27459 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27462 \begin_layout Subsection
27463 Bibliography layout
27464 \begin_inset Index idx
27467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27468 Bibliography ! Layout
27476 \begin_layout Standard
27477 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27478 For this feature you need to enable the option
27484 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27488 \begin_inset Index idx
27491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27492 Document ! Settings
27502 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27503 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27504 in the previous section.
27507 \begin_layout Standard
27508 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27509 the citation reference window.
27510 Here is an example where the text
27511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27515 \begin_inset space ~
27519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27522 appears after the reference:
27525 \begin_layout Standard
27527 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27530 key "latexcompanion"
27537 \begin_layout Section
27539 \begin_inset Index idx
27542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27558 \begin_layout Standard
27559 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27561 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27563 \begin_inset space ~
27568 or the toolbar button
27575 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27576 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27577 by LyX as the index entry.
27580 \begin_layout Standard
27581 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27583 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27584 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27586 \begin_inset space ~
27592 A light blue box labeled
27593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27604 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27605 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27608 \begin_layout Standard
27609 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27610 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27612 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27614 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27621 \begin_layout Subsection
27622 Grouping Index Entries
27623 \begin_inset Index idx
27626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27635 \begin_layout Standard
27636 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27638 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27639 lists under the entry
27640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27648 First we create the entry
27649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27657 \begin_inset space ~
27661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27663 reference "sub:Lists"
27668 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27675 reference "sec:Itemize"
27679 , we insert the command
27682 \begin_layout Standard
27688 \begin_layout Standard
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27699 for the enumerated list in section
27700 \begin_inset space ~
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27706 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27714 The exclamation mark
27715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27722 marks the grouping levels.
27723 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27724 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27725 If we don't have an index entry for
27726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27733 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27736 \begin_layout Subsection
27738 \begin_inset Index idx
27741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27742 Index ! Page ranges
27750 \begin_layout Standard
27751 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27753 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27754 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27755 an index entry in section
27756 \begin_inset space ~
27760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27762 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27769 \begin_layout Standard
27772 Paragraph environments|(
27775 \begin_layout Standard
27776 and another entry at the end of section
27777 \begin_inset space ~
27781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27783 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27790 \begin_layout Standard
27793 Paragraph environments|)
27796 \begin_layout Standard
27798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27821 respectively start and end the index range.
27822 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27823 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27824 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27825 An example is the index entry
27826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27829 Document ! Settings
27830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27836 \begin_layout Subsection
27838 \begin_inset Index idx
27841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27842 Index ! Cross referencing
27850 \begin_layout Standard
27851 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27852 We referred for example in the index entry
27853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27861 \begin_inset space ~
27865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27867 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27871 ) to the index entry
27872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27879 in the same section using the entry
27882 \begin_layout Standard
27885 GIF|see{Image formats}
27888 \begin_layout Standard
27889 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27890 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27891 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27894 \begin_layout Subsection
27896 \begin_inset Index idx
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27900 Index ! Entry order
27908 \begin_layout Standard
27909 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27910 follow the rules for the index order.
27911 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27916 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27918 \begin_inset space ~
27922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27924 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27933 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27934 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27959 \begin_inset Index idx
27962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27963 Dummy entries ! maïs
27969 \begin_inset Index idx
27972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27973 Dummy entries ! maître
27979 \begin_inset Index idx
27982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27983 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27988 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27989 maïs, maison, maître.
27990 To achieve this, we use the command
27993 \begin_layout Standard
27996 previous entry@current entry
27999 \begin_layout Standard
28000 In our case we want to have
28001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28016 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28025 \begin_layout Standard
28026 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28027 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28028 See the next subsection for an example.
28031 \begin_layout Standard
28032 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28038 \begin_layout Standard
28039 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28044 to generate the index (see sec.
28045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28051 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28060 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28068 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28072 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28073 index commands start with
28074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28086 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28091 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28094 \begin_layout Standard
28106 \begin_layout Standard
28118 \begin_layout Subsection
28120 \begin_inset Index idx
28123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28124 Index ! Entry layout
28132 \begin_layout Standard
28133 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28134 \begin_inset Index idx
28137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28140 This is an italic dummy entry
28145 You can also format the page number using the character
28146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28153 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28154 We can write for example
28157 \begin_layout Standard
28160 italic page number:|textit
28163 \begin_layout Standard
28164 to get the page number in italic.
28165 \begin_inset Index idx
28168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28169 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28174 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28192 \begin_inset space ~
28198 Have a look at section
28199 \begin_inset space ~
28203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28205 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28209 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28212 \begin_layout Standard
28213 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28221 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28225 to generate the index, see sec.
28226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28232 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28241 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28246 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28250 key "latexcompanion"
28262 \begin_layout Standard
28263 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28265 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28266 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28267 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28268 If so, put the following in the preamble
28271 \begin_layout Standard
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28293 \begin_layout Standard
28294 in the index entry.
28295 \begin_inset Index idx
28298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28299 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28304 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28305 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28306 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28310 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28311 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28312 a bold font for all index entries.
28313 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28325 documentation for details,
28326 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28328 key "makeindex,xindy"
28335 \begin_layout Subsection
28337 \begin_inset Index idx
28340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28349 name "sub:Index-Program"
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 If the index generation program
28361 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28365 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28374 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28375 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28376 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28377 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28378 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28388 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28389 dialog, see section
28390 \begin_inset space ~
28394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28396 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28401 The available options are listed and explained in
28402 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28404 key "makeindex,xindy"
28409 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28413 \begin_layout Standard
28414 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28415 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28418 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28419 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28423 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28424 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28427 \begin_layout Subsection
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28432 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28433 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28441 next to the standard index.
28442 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28443 that add this feature.
28449 \begin_inset Index idx
28452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28453 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28458 package to generate multiple indexes.
28459 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28464 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28465 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28472 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28473 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28474 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28482 \begin_layout Standard
28483 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28485 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28486 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28489 and select the option
28491 Use multiple Indexes
28498 already contains the standard index
28499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28507 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28508 also appear as a heading) to the
28512 input field and press the
28517 The new index now also appears in the list.
28518 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28522 \begin_layout Standard
28523 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28526 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28533 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28534 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28535 are additional features:
28538 \begin_layout Itemize
28539 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28540 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28543 \begin_layout Itemize
28544 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28545 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28553 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28554 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28555 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28556 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28559 \begin_layout Section
28560 Nomenclature/Glossary
28561 \begin_inset Index idx
28564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28571 \begin_inset Index idx
28574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28605 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28612 \begin_layout Standard
28613 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28614 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28615 called nomenclature or glossary.
28618 \begin_layout Standard
28619 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28625 \begin_inset Index idx
28628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28635 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28642 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28646 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28647 and then use the menu
28649 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28655 \begin_inset space ~
28660 or the toolbar button
28663 arg "nomencl-insert"
28668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28679 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28682 \begin_layout Standard
28683 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28684 The first is the term or
28688 that you wish to define.
28693 of the term or symbol.
28696 \begin_layout Standard
28697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28705 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28713 \begin_layout Subsection
28714 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28715 \begin_inset Index idx
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28719 Nomenclature ! Layout
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28728 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28732 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28738 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28746 \begin_inset Newline newline
28754 \begin_inset Newline newline
28760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28767 character starts/ends the formula.
28768 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28790 \begin_layout Standard
28791 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28792 \begin_inset space ~
28796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28798 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28805 \begin_layout Standard
28809 \begin_inset space ~
28814 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28815 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28820 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28827 in this document is:
28828 \begin_inset Newline newline
28833 dummy entry for the character
28838 \begin_inset Newline newline
28850 \begin_inset space ~
28860 font use the command
28889 \begin_layout Standard
28890 If the characters |
28891 \begin_inset space \space{}
28895 \begin_inset space \space{}
28899 \begin_inset space \space{}
28903 \begin_inset space \space{}
28907 \begin_inset space \space{}
28910 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28911 a quote character in front of them.
28912 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28913 LatexCommand nomenclature
28914 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28915 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28922 \begin_layout Subsection
28923 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28924 \begin_inset Index idx
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28928 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28936 \begin_layout Standard
28937 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28938 the symbol definition.
28939 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28941 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28944 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28945 LatexCommand nomenclature
28947 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28954 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28958 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28959 LatexCommand nomenclature
28962 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28967 They will be sorted by
28968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28994 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28997 will be sorted before the
29001 since the character
29002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29009 is considered in sorting.
29012 \begin_layout Standard
29013 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29016 \begin_inset space ~
29021 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29022 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29024 For the example given, you can insert
29028 in this field for the
29029 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29036 will be located before
29037 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29043 \begin_layout Standard
29044 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29049 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29058 \begin_layout Subsection
29059 Nomenclature Options
29060 \begin_inset Index idx
29063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29064 Nomenclature ! Options
29072 \begin_layout Standard
29077 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29078 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29081 \begin_layout Description
29082 refeq Appends the phrase
29083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29098 to every nomenclature entry, where
29104 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29107 \begin_layout Description
29108 refpage Appends the phrase
29109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29124 to every nomenclature entry, where
29130 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29133 \begin_layout Description
29134 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29139 class options list in the
29141 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29145 In this document the options
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29153 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29159 \begin_layout Standard
29160 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29161 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29166 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29169 \begin_layout Description
29179 \begin_layout Description
29182 nomrefpage Like the
29189 \begin_layout Description
29192 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29201 \begin_layout Description
29205 \begin_inset space ~
29211 \begin_inset space ~
29216 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29219 \begin_layout Standard
29221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29228 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29229 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29232 \begin_layout Standard
29240 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29243 \begin_inset Newline newline
29250 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29255 \begin_inset Newline newline
29259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29274 by their translation.
29277 \begin_layout Subsection
29278 Printing the Nomenclature
29279 \begin_inset Index idx
29282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29283 Nomenclature ! Printing
29291 \begin_layout Standard
29292 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29294 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29295 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29311 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29312 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29313 You can choose between these settings:
29316 \begin_layout Description
29317 Default a space of 1
29318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29324 \begin_layout Description
29326 \begin_inset space ~
29330 \begin_inset space ~
29333 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29336 \begin_layout Description
29337 Custom custom space
29340 \begin_layout Standard
29341 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29350 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29358 For example, in order to change the name to
29362 , add the following line to the preamble:
29365 \begin_layout Standard
29373 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29376 \begin_layout Subsection
29377 Nomenclature Program
29378 \begin_inset Index idx
29381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29382 Nomenclature ! Program
29388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29390 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29397 \begin_layout Standard
29398 LyX uses the program
29402 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29403 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29408 by adding options, see section
29409 \begin_inset space ~
29413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29415 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29420 The available options are listed and explained in
29421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29423 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29430 \begin_layout Section
29432 \begin_inset Index idx
29435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29442 \begin_inset Index idx
29445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29446 Document ! Branches
29452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29454 name "sec:Branches"
29461 \begin_layout Standard
29462 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29463 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29464 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29465 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29468 \begin_layout Standard
29469 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29470 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29471 To create a branch, either select the menu
29473 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29474 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29477 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29479 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29486 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29487 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29488 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29489 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29490 (see below for an example).
29491 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29492 to the name of the other) and to add
29493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29505 \begin_inset space ~
29508 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29509 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29512 \begin_layout Standard
29513 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29514 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29516 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29519 where you can choose a branch.
29520 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29525 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29526 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29529 \begin_layout Standard
29530 \begin_inset Branch Question
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29534 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29543 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29546 \begin_layout Standard
29547 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29555 \begin_layout Standard
29562 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29563 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29566 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29567 Consider for example a file
29568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29575 which has the above branches.
29577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29584 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29608 branch were inactive,
29609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29624 branch was active, likewise
29625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29640 branch was active, and
29641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29644 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29648 if both branches were active.
29649 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29652 \begin_layout Standard
29653 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29659 \begin_layout Standard
29660 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29661 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29663 For example you can define for the question branch
29667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29668 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29669 \begin_inset space ~
29673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29675 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29687 \begin_layout Standard
29697 \begin_layout Standard
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29708 and for the answer branch
29711 \begin_layout Standard
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29732 \begin_inset Branch Question
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29767 \begin_layout Standard
29768 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29771 \begin_layout Standard
29775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29803 \begin_layout Standard
29804 Now it is possible to use the
29808 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29815 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29818 commands to obtain conditional output.
29819 Here is an example formula where only the
29826 \begin_inset Formula
29828 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29836 \begin_layout Standard
29837 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29845 \begin_layout Standard
29846 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29852 \begin_inset space \space{}
29855 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29856 For this advanced usage, see the
29861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29864 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29871 \begin_layout Section
29873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29875 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29880 \begin_inset Index idx
29883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29892 \begin_layout Standard
29895 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29896 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29899 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29901 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29906 \begin_inset Index idx
29909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29910 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29915 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29916 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29917 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29918 part of the document.
29922 \begin_layout Standard
29923 The header information in the dialog tab
29927 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29928 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29929 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29930 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29934 \begin_inset space ~
29938 \begin_inset space ~
29943 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29944 title and author entries.
29948 \begin_inset space ~
29952 \begin_inset space ~
29956 \begin_inset space ~
29961 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29964 \begin_layout Standard
29965 You can specify in the dialog tab
29969 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29974 \begin_inset space ~
29978 \begin_inset space ~
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29987 option allows long links to be split;
29990 \begin_inset space ~
29994 \begin_inset space ~
29998 \begin_inset space ~
30006 \begin_inset space ~
30011 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30014 \begin_inset space ~
30019 colors the different links.
30020 The default colors are:
30023 \begin_layout Labeling
30024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30029 for hyperlinks and URLs
30032 \begin_layout Labeling
30033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30041 \begin_layout Labeling
30042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30050 \begin_layout Standard
30051 but you can change these in the field
30056 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30062 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30065 \begin_layout Standard
30070 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30071 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30072 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30075 \begin_layout Standard
30080 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30081 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30082 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30092 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30093 when opening the PDF.
30095 \begin_inset space ~
30098 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30102 1 will only display the sections.
30105 \begin_layout Standard
30106 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30107 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30113 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30114 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30123 \begin_layout Section
30124 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30127 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30134 \begin_layout Subsection
30136 \begin_inset Index idx
30139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30148 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30155 \begin_layout Standard
30156 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30157 constructs, but not all.
30158 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30159 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30160 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30161 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30162 and their commands.
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30166 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30168 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30170 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30183 \begin_inset space ~
30188 or by the toolbar button
30201 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30210 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30211 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30212 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30213 using the LaTeX-command
30219 , you can write the command part
30225 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30229 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30230 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30231 the following example:
30234 \begin_layout Standard
30235 \begin_inset Graphics
30236 filename clipart/ERT.png
30244 \begin_layout Standard
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30249 This is a line with a
30253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30276 \begin_layout Standard
30277 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30285 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30286 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30294 \begin_layout Subsection
30295 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30296 \begin_inset Argument 1
30299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30306 \begin_inset Index idx
30309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30318 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30325 \begin_layout Standard
30326 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30327 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30328 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30337 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30338 any time if you know the right commands.
30339 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30340 is the end of the day.
30341 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30342 all caption labels bold.
30343 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30345 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30349 \begin_layout Standard
30350 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30351 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30352 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30363 \begin_layout Standard
30364 As result you find that the package
30369 \begin_inset Index idx
30372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30373 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30379 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30381 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30384 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30399 \begin_inset space ~
30407 \begin_layout Standard
30412 usepackage[options]{package name}
30415 \begin_layout Standard
30416 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30417 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30418 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30421 \begin_layout Standard
30422 In your case the package name is
30427 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30432 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30433 So you add the command
30436 \begin_layout Standard
30441 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30450 For more commands provided by the
30454 package, have a look at its documentation,
30455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30469 \begin_layout Standard
30470 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30472 For example if you use a
30476 class, you don't need the package
30480 , you can instead write
30483 \begin_layout Standard
30488 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30494 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30495 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30496 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30503 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30506 \begin_layout Standard
30507 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30508 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30510 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30511 the previous section.
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30515 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30519 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30527 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 \begin_inset Note Note
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30559 \begin_layout Left Header
30560 \begin_inset Argument 1
30563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30583 \begin_inset Note Note
30586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30587 defines the header line as described below
30595 \begin_layout Center Header
30596 \begin_inset Argument 1
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30608 \begin_layout Right Header
30609 \begin_inset Argument 1
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 \begin_layout Left Footer
30634 \begin_inset Argument 1
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 \begin_layout Center Footer
30659 \begin_inset Argument 1
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30673 \begin_inset Newline newline
30677 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30683 \begin_layout Right Footer
30684 \begin_inset Argument 1
30687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30709 \begin_layout Section
30710 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30713 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30718 \begin_inset Index idx
30721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30722 Document ! Header/Footer line
30728 \begin_inset Index idx
30731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30745 \begin_inset space ~
30756 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30762 \begin_inset space ~
30768 As a second step add in the menu
30770 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30771 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30778 Custom Header/Footerlines
30779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30783 This module offers the following 6
30784 \begin_inset space ~
30790 \begin_layout Description
30792 \begin_inset space ~
30796 \begin_inset space ~
30800 \begin_inset space ~
30804 \begin_inset space ~
30808 \begin_inset space ~
30814 \begin_layout Description
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30820 \begin_inset space ~
30824 \begin_inset space ~
30828 \begin_inset space ~
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30838 \begin_layout Standard
30839 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30842 \begin_layout Standard
30843 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30844 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30846 \begin_inset space ~
30850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30852 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30856 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30859 \begin_layout Standard
30860 \begin_inset Float figure
30866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30869 \begin_inset Tabular
30870 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30871 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30872 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30873 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30874 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30894 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30923 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30938 The normal text on the page goes here.
30939 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30941 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30942 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30947 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31014 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31032 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31037 name "fig:Page-layout"
31041 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31054 \begin_layout Standard
31055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31063 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31067 \begin_inset space ~
31072 is set to “Default”.
31073 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31082 \begin_layout Subsection
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31087 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31088 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31089 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31090 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31092 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31093 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31096 \begin_layout Standard
31097 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31100 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 \begin_inset space ~
31121 \begin_layout Description
31124 thepage prints the current page number
31127 \begin_layout Description
31130 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31133 \begin_layout Description
31136 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31139 \begin_layout Description
31142 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31143 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31150 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31153 because it usually goes in a left header.
31156 \begin_layout Description
31159 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31160 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31162 It is normally used in the right header.
31165 \begin_layout Subsection
31166 Default header/footer
31169 \begin_layout Standard
31170 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31171 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31172 footer has the page number.
31173 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31174 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31175 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31178 \begin_inset space ~
31186 \begin_layout Subsection
31190 \begin_layout Standard
31191 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31192 Some pages are different.
31193 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31194 a new part or chapter in your book.
31195 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31196 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31197 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31201 Header and footer decoration line
31204 \begin_layout Standard
31205 By default, you get a 0.4
31206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31209 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31210 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31222 in the following way:
31225 \begin_layout Standard
31232 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31235 \begin_layout Standard
31236 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31245 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31252 \begin_layout Standard
31253 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31254 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31255 \begin_inset space ~
31259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31269 Several header/footer lines
31272 \begin_layout Standard
31273 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31274 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31275 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31277 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31291 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31292 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31305 \begin_inset space ~
31313 \begin_layout Standard
31320 headheight}{height}
31323 \begin_layout Standard
31324 where height is a size in standard units.
31325 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31326 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31327 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31329 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31346 \begin_inset space ~
31351 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31356 \begin_inset Index idx
31359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31360 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31366 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31367 for your header/footer.
31370 \begin_layout Subsection
31374 \begin_layout Standard
31375 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31376 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31377 This example consists of the following definition:
31380 \begin_layout Description
31382 \begin_inset space ~
31391 , empty optional argument
31394 \begin_layout Description
31396 \begin_inset space ~
31399 Header empty, empty optional argument
31402 \begin_layout Description
31404 \begin_inset space ~
31413 in the optional argument
31416 \begin_layout Description
31418 \begin_inset space ~
31427 in the optional argument
31430 \begin_layout Description
31432 \begin_inset space ~
31444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31448 \begin_inset Newline newline
31452 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31459 in the optional argument
31462 \begin_layout Description
31464 \begin_inset space ~
31473 , empty optional argument
31476 \begin_layout Description
31479 headrulewidth set to 2
31480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31486 \begin_layout Standard
31487 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31488 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31494 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31503 \begin_layout Standard
31504 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31510 \begin_layout Standard
31514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31518 pagestyle{headings}
31524 \begin_inset Note Note
31527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31528 switches back to page style with the default headings
31536 \begin_layout Section
31537 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31540 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31545 \begin_inset Index idx
31548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31555 \begin_inset Index idx
31558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31567 \begin_layout Standard
31568 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31569 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31570 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31573 \begin_layout Subsection
31577 \begin_layout Standard
31578 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31583 \begin_inset Index idx
31586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31587 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31592 (on some systems named simply
31597 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31605 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31606 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31614 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31615 automatically installed together with LyX.
31618 \begin_layout Subsection
31622 \begin_layout Standard
31623 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31624 LaTeX, activate the option
31627 \begin_inset space ~
31634 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31644 \begin_inset space ~
31647 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31654 \begin_inset space ~
31667 \begin_inset space ~
31672 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31676 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31688 \begin_inset space ~
31696 \begin_layout Standard
31697 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31701 \begin_layout Standard
31702 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31710 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31711 generated by activating the option
31714 \begin_inset space ~
31720 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31728 \begin_layout Subsection
31729 Selected document parts
31732 \begin_layout Standard
31733 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31734 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31735 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31736 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31738 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31742 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31743 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31744 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31747 \begin_layout Standard
31748 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31754 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31765 is explained in section
31767 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31772 \begin_inset space ~
31782 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31783 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31785 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31787 Here is the result:
31790 \begin_layout Standard
31791 \begin_inset Preview
31793 \begin_layout Standard
31798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31802 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31808 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31818 height_special "totalheight"
31821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31846 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31852 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31875 Previewing works also for colors.
31876 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31894 is explained in section
31901 \begin_inset space ~
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 \begin_inset Preview
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31940 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31945 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31964 \begin_layout Standard
31965 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31972 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31973 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31974 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31976 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31977 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31978 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31979 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31983 \begin_layout Subsection
31987 \begin_layout Standard
31988 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31991 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31993 \begin_inset space ~
31998 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31999 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32001 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
32002 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32003 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32004 the source view window.
32009 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32010 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32011 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32014 \begin_layout Section
32015 Advanced Find and Replace
32016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32018 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32023 \begin_inset Index idx
32026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32033 \begin_inset Index idx
32036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32045 \begin_layout Subsection
32049 \begin_layout Standard
32050 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32051 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32052 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32053 The key-features are:
32056 \begin_layout Itemize
32057 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32058 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32059 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32063 \begin_layout Itemize
32064 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32065 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32066 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32067 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32070 \begin_layout Itemize
32071 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32072 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32073 outside of mathematics environments
32076 \begin_layout Itemize
32077 Search may be widened to a specific
32082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32086 \begin_inset space ~
32089 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32090 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32097 \begin_layout Itemize
32098 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32099 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32104 \begin_inset space ~
32107 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32110 \begin_layout Subsection
32114 \begin_layout Standard
32115 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32117 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32130 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32133 ) or the toolbar button
32136 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32142 Advanced Find and Replace
32147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32151 \begin_layout Standard
32156 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32160 \begin_inset space ~
32165 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32168 arg "paragraph-break"
32172 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32173 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32177 arg "paragraph-break"
32180 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32184 searches backwards.
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32191 \begin_inset space ~
32196 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32205 \begin_inset space ~
32210 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32214 Searching for mathematics
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32218 Mathematical formulas, such as
32219 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32222 or something more complex like
32223 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32226 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32231 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32232 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32233 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32234 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32244 \begin_layout Standard
32245 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32246 This is done by switching to the
32250 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32255 This way, entering in the
32262 \begin_layout Itemize
32263 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32264 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32267 \begin_layout Itemize
32268 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32269 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32272 \begin_layout Itemize
32273 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32274 of it only within section headings.
32275 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32276 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32280 \begin_layout Itemize
32281 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32282 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32289 \begin_layout Standard
32290 The entries made in the
32294 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32297 \begin_inset space ~
32303 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32307 button or alternatively press
32310 arg "paragraph-break"
32317 while the cursor is in the
32320 \begin_inset space ~
32328 \begin_layout Standard
32329 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32330 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32334 \begin_layout Itemize
32335 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32336 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32344 with its typewriter version
32345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32359 \begin_layout Itemize
32360 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32366 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32378 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32385 (you may want to enable the
32388 \begin_inset space ~
32396 \begin_inset space ~
32401 options and disable the
32409 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32417 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32418 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32422 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32425 , or occurrences of
32426 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32430 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32436 \begin_layout Subsection
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32441 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32446 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32450 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32459 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32465 This is done with the context menu
32467 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32468 Insert Regular Expression
32470 while the cursor is in the
32475 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32476 expression matching rules
32480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32481 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32487 \begin_inset space ~
32490 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32491 to match expressions.
32496 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32497 same text in the document.
32498 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32499 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32502 \begin_layout Enumerate
32503 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32508 editor the fraction
32509 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32513 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32516 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32517 fractions with the given denominator.
32520 \begin_layout Enumerate
32521 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32533 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32538 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32539 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32540 Also, by inserting a
32541 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32544 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32545 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32548 \begin_layout Standard
32549 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32550 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32551 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32554 , and referring back to them through
32555 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32559 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32563 For example, try searching with the regexp
32564 \begin_inset Newline newline
32567 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32570 \begin_inset Newline newline
32573 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32577 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32580 \begin_layout Standard
32581 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32589 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32590 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32591 sub-expressions is absolute.
32593 \begin_inset space ~
32597 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32600 always refers to the first occurrence of
32601 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32604 in all entered regexps.
32612 \begin_layout Section
32614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32616 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32621 \begin_inset Index idx
32624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32633 \begin_layout Standard
32634 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32637 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32644 key or the toolbar button
32647 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32650 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32651 beginning of the currently selected text.
32652 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32653 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32654 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32655 scrolled so that it is visible.
32656 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32657 n, if any could be found.
32658 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32662 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32663 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32667 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32670 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32674 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32675 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32676 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32677 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32680 \begin_inset space ~
32688 arg "dialog-show character"
32691 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32692 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32695 \begin_layout Standard
32696 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32697 \begin_inset Newline newline
32701 \begin_inset Flex URL
32704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32712 \begin_inset Newline newline
32716 \begin_inset space ~
32719 files for each language.
32720 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32721 \begin_inset space ~
32724 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32733 \begin_inset Newline newline
32736 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32737 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32738 but in most cases these are
32754 is the language code.
32757 \begin_layout Subsection
32761 \begin_layout Standard
32764 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32765 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32767 \begin_inset space ~
32770 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32773 you can set the following things:
32776 \begin_layout Description
32778 \begin_inset space ~
32781 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32782 Depending on your platform,
32796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32797 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32798 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32813 \begin_layout Description
32815 \begin_inset space ~
32818 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32819 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32822 \begin_layout Description
32824 \begin_inset space ~
32827 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32833 \begin_inset space \space{}
32837 This should normally not be needed.
32840 \begin_layout Description
32842 \begin_inset space ~
32846 \begin_inset space ~
32849 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32861 \begin_layout Description
32863 \begin_inset space ~
32866 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32867 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32868 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32869 appear in a context menu.
32870 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32874 \begin_layout Description
32876 \begin_inset space ~
32880 \begin_inset space ~
32884 \begin_inset space ~
32887 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32891 \begin_layout Section
32893 \begin_inset Index idx
32896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32905 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32914 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32926 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32935 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32936 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32937 which are available for many languages.
32940 \begin_layout Standard
32941 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32945 \begin_layout Subsection
32946 Setting up the thesaurus
32949 \begin_layout Standard
32958 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32962 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32967 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32973 \begin_inset space ~
32981 For instance, the US English files are named:
32984 \begin_layout Itemize
32988 \begin_layout Itemize
32992 \begin_layout Standard
33001 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33002 and you just need to point LyX (in
33004 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33005 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33006 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33008 \begin_inset space ~
33013 ) to the path where they are installed.
33017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33018 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33019 ies, typical locations are
33025 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33029 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33033 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33036 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33042 LibreOffice-<Version>
33049 On the Mac, the default location is
33051 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33052 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33053 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33054 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33055 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33056 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33064 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33065 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33066 correct place right away.
33069 \begin_layout Standard
33070 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33071 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33075 \begin_layout Itemize
33076 \begin_inset Flex URL
33079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33081 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33089 \begin_layout Standard
33090 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33091 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33093 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33094 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33095 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33097 \begin_inset space ~
33103 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33104 and point LyX there.
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33110 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33113 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33119 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33122 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33130 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33131 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33132 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33134 \begin_inset space ~
33139 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33142 \begin_layout Subsection
33143 Using the thesaurus
33146 \begin_layout Standard
33147 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33149 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33152 or the toolbar button
33155 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33158 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33160 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33162 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33163 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33164 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33173 ), related terms (such as
33176 \begin_inset space ~
33185 ), compounds (such as
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33197 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33206 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33209 \begin_layout Standard
33210 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33211 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33216 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33217 the dictionary, such as the above
33221 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33226 \begin_inset space \space{}
33229 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33230 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33231 For example, looking up the word form
33235 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33240 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33245 \begin_inset space \space{}
33256 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33257 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33258 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33261 \begin_layout Section
33263 \begin_inset Index idx
33266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33273 \begin_inset Index idx
33276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33277 Document ! Change Tracking
33283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33285 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33292 \begin_layout Standard
33293 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33294 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33295 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33296 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33298 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33303 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33305 \begin_inset space ~
33313 \begin_layout Standard
33314 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33328 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33329 You can change the color in
33331 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33332 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33334 \begin_inset space ~
33338 \begin_inset space ~
33343 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33349 \begin_inset Index idx
33352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33353 Color ! Change tracking
33358 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33359 the cursor is in changed text.
33360 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33363 arg "changes-merge"
33369 \begin_layout Standard
33370 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33371 \begin_inset Index idx
33374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 \begin_layout Standard
33384 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33390 \begin_layout Standard
33391 \begin_inset Graphics
33392 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33400 \begin_layout Standard
33401 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33408 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33411 \begin_layout Standard
33412 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33418 \begin_layout Standard
33419 \begin_inset Tabular
33420 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33421 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33422 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33423 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 arg "changes-track"
33441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33449 \begin_inset space ~
33452 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33454 \begin_inset space ~
33463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33472 arg "changes-output"
33480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33486 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33488 \begin_inset space ~
33491 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33497 \begin_inset space ~
33501 \begin_inset space ~
33510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33531 Jumps to the next change
33537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33546 arg "change-accept"
33554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33560 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33562 \begin_inset space ~
33565 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33567 \begin_inset space ~
33576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 arg "change-reject"
33593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33604 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33606 \begin_inset space ~
33615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33624 arg "changes-merge"
33632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33643 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33645 \begin_inset space ~
33654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33663 arg "all-changes-accept"
33671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33677 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33679 \begin_inset space ~
33682 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33684 \begin_inset space ~
33688 \begin_inset space ~
33697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 arg "all-changes-reject"
33714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33725 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33727 \begin_inset space ~
33731 \begin_inset space ~
33740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33763 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33764 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33777 \begin_inset space ~
33786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33809 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33827 \begin_layout Standard
33828 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33834 \begin_layout Standard
33835 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33855 \begin_layout Standard
33856 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33857 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33858 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33859 the next change after the current cursor position.
33860 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33861 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33862 step to the next change.
33863 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33866 \begin_layout Standard
33867 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33868 to describe a change.
33871 \begin_layout Standard
33872 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33877 \begin_inset Index idx
33880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33881 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33887 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33888 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33894 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33897 \begin_layout Section
33898 Comparison of Documents
33899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33901 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33906 \begin_inset Index idx
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33910 Comparison of documents
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33921 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33925 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33927 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33928 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33932 \begin_inset space ~
33936 \begin_inset space ~
33940 \begin_inset space ~
33949 \begin_inset space ~
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33965 \begin_inset space ~
33969 \begin_inset space ~
33974 enables the change tracking option
33977 \begin_inset space ~
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33990 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33993 \begin_layout Section
33994 International Support
33995 \begin_inset Index idx
33998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 International support
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34008 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34009 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34010 up LyX to use them:
34011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34013 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34020 \begin_layout Standard
34021 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34022 \begin_inset space ~
34026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34028 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34035 \begin_layout Subsection
34037 \begin_inset Index idx
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34047 \begin_inset Index idx
34050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34051 Document ! Settings
34057 \begin_inset Index idx
34060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34061 Document ! Language
34069 \begin_layout Standard
34072 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34073 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34076 dialog lets you set
34078 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34088 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34092 \begin_inset space ~
34097 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34098 For details about the different encoding options see section
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34105 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34112 \begin_layout Subsection
34113 Keyboard mapping configuration
34114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34116 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34123 \begin_layout Standard
34124 If you have for example a U.
34125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34128 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34129 can use an alternate keymap.
34130 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34131 use an Italian keymap.
34134 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34135 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34136 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34139 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34140 \begin_inset space ~
34144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34146 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34151 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34152 which one you want to use.
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34156 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34157 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34158 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34162 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34163 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34164 one to support the characters you want.
34165 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34172 \begin_layout Chapter
34175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34177 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34186 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34187 topic inside the user's guide.
34190 \begin_layout Section
34192 \begin_inset Index idx
34195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34204 \begin_layout Standard
34209 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34212 \begin_layout Subsection
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 Creates a new document.
34220 \begin_layout Subsection
34224 \begin_layout Standard
34225 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34226 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34227 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34230 \begin_layout Subsection
34234 \begin_layout Standard
34238 \begin_layout Subsection
34242 \begin_layout Standard
34243 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34244 Click there on a file to open it.
34247 \begin_layout Subsection
34251 \begin_layout Standard
34252 Closes the current document.
34255 \begin_layout Subsection
34259 \begin_layout Standard
34260 Closes all opened documents.
34263 \begin_layout Subsection
34267 \begin_layout Standard
34268 Saves the actual document.
34271 \begin_layout Subsection
34275 \begin_layout Standard
34276 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34279 \begin_layout Subsection
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 Saves all opened documents.
34287 \begin_layout Subsection
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34295 \begin_layout Subsection
34299 \begin_layout Standard
34300 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34301 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34302 It is described in the section
34304 Version Control in LyX
34308 Additional Features
34313 \begin_layout Subsection
34317 \begin_layout Standard
34318 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34319 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34321 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34325 When using the menu entry
34328 \begin_inset space ~
34333 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34337 \begin_inset space ~
34341 \begin_inset space ~
34345 \begin_inset space ~
34350 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34351 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34354 \begin_layout Subsection
34356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34365 \begin_layout Standard
34366 You can export your document to various file formats.
34367 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34368 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34369 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34372 \begin_layout Standard
34373 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34375 \begin_inset space ~
34379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34381 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34388 \begin_layout Description
34394 \begin_inset space ~
34401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34408 yX format of the special LyX
34409 \begin_inset space ~
34412 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34413 \begin_inset Newline newline
34416 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34419 \begin_layout Description
34420 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34426 \begin_layout Description
34428 \begin_inset space ~
34431 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34437 \begin_layout Description
34438 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34439 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34440 files paths or file names in your document.
34441 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34448 \begin_layout Description
34449 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34450 in files paths or file names
34453 \begin_layout Description
34455 \begin_inset space ~
34462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34469 eX) DVI-format using the program
34473 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34476 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34492 \begin_layout Description
34494 \begin_inset space ~
34497 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34501 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34506 \begin_layout Description
34507 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34511 \begin_layout Description
34513 \begin_inset space ~
34517 \begin_inset space ~
34520 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34524 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34532 \begin_layout Description
34539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34547 \begin_inset space ~
34558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34571 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34576 \begin_layout Description
34583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34591 \begin_inset space ~
34596 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34597 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34601 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34604 \begin_layout Description
34611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34619 \begin_inset space ~
34624 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34625 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34633 \begin_layout Description
34640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34648 \begin_inset space ~
34659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34672 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34677 \begin_layout Description
34679 \begin_inset space ~
34683 \begin_inset space ~
34692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34701 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34702 music notation software
34707 \begin_layout Description
34714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34728 \begin_inset space ~
34731 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34732 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34733 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34736 \begin_layout Description
34743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34753 \begin_inset space ~
34756 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34772 represent the version number)
34775 \begin_layout Description
34782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34791 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34794 \begin_layout Description
34795 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34800 \begin_layout Description
34801 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34803 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34806 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34810 \begin_layout Description
34814 \begin_inset space ~
34819 PDF-format using the program
34823 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34826 \begin_layout Description
34830 \begin_inset space ~
34837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34846 PDF-format using the program
34850 , produces PDF-files directly
34853 \begin_layout Description
34857 \begin_inset space ~
34862 PDF-format using the program
34866 , produces PDF-files directly
34869 \begin_layout Description
34873 \begin_inset space ~
34878 PDF-format using the program
34882 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34885 \begin_layout Description
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34905 PDF-format using the program
34909 , produces PDF-files directly
34912 \begin_layout Description
34916 \begin_inset space ~
34924 \begin_layout Description
34928 \begin_inset space ~
34932 \begin_inset space ~
34937 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34938 and then exported as text using the program
34943 \begin_layout Description
34948 PostScript format using the program
34953 \begin_layout Description
34954 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34955 programming language
34968 it is possible to use
34975 \begin_layout Standard
34976 If one of the menu entries
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34992 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34993 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34994 \begin_inset space ~
34998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35000 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35005 \begin_inset Index idx
35008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35009 Reconfiguration of LyX
35017 \begin_layout Subsection
35021 \begin_layout Standard
35022 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35023 format or send it to a printer.
35024 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35025 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35031 For more information have a look at section
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35038 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35045 \begin_layout Subsection
35049 \begin_layout Standard
35050 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35051 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35052 prefix, see section
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35059 reference "sec:Paths"
35064 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35073 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35074 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35075 \begin_inset space ~
35079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35081 reference "sub:Converters"
35088 \begin_layout Subsection
35089 New and Close Window
35092 \begin_layout Standard
35093 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35096 \begin_layout Subsection
35100 \begin_layout Standard
35101 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35104 \begin_layout Section
35106 \begin_inset Index idx
35109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35118 \begin_layout Subsection
35122 \begin_layout Standard
35123 Described in section
35124 \begin_inset space ~
35128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35130 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35137 \begin_layout Subsection
35138 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 Described in section
35143 \begin_inset space ~
35147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35149 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35156 \begin_layout Subsection
35160 \begin_layout Standard
35161 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35162 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35165 \begin_layout Subsection
35169 \begin_layout Standard
35170 Selects the whole document.
35173 \begin_layout Subsection
35174 Find & Replace (Quick)
35177 \begin_layout Standard
35178 Described in section
35179 \begin_inset space ~
35183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35185 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35192 \begin_layout Subsection
35193 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35196 \begin_layout Standard
35197 Described in section
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35204 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35211 \begin_layout Subsection
35212 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35215 \begin_layout Standard
35216 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35220 \begin_layout Subsection
35224 \begin_layout Standard
35225 Described in section
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35232 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35239 \begin_layout Subsection
35241 \begin_inset Index idx
35244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35245 Paragraph ! Settings
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35254 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35255 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35259 \begin_layout Standard
35260 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35261 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35267 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35268 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35270 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_layout Subsection
35282 \begin_layout Standard
35283 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35284 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35285 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35289 \begin_layout Standard
35290 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35292 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35293 The properties of tables are described in section
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35300 reference "sec:Tables"
35304 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35311 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35318 \begin_layout Subsection
35319 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35322 \begin_layout Standard
35323 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35325 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35326 \begin_inset space ~
35330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35332 reference "sec:Nesting"
35337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35339 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35346 \begin_layout Subsection
35349 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35352 \begin_layout Standard
35353 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35354 nts of the same type.
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35362 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35366 for an explanation.
35369 \begin_layout Section
35371 \begin_inset Index idx
35374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35383 \begin_layout Standard
35384 At the bottom of the
35388 menu the opened documents are listed.
35391 \begin_layout Subsection
35392 Open/Close all Insets
35395 \begin_layout Standard
35396 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35399 \begin_layout Subsection
35400 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35403 \begin_layout Standard
35404 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35408 Math macros are described in the
35415 \begin_layout Subsection
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35420 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35421 \begin_inset space ~
35425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35427 reference "sec:Navigating"
35432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35434 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35441 \begin_layout Subsection
35445 \begin_layout Standard
35446 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35448 \begin_inset space ~
35452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35454 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35461 \begin_layout Subsection
35465 \begin_layout Standard
35466 Opens a window showing console messages.
35467 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35471 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35472 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35475 \begin_layout Subsection
35477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35479 name "sub:Toolbars"
35484 \begin_inset Index idx
35487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35496 \begin_layout Standard
35497 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35498 All toolbars and the
35501 \begin_inset space ~
35506 can be turned on and off.
35511 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35523 \begin_inset space ~
35535 \begin_inset space ~
35540 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35544 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35551 \begin_layout Standard
35556 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35560 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35561 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35562 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35563 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35564 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35567 \begin_layout Standard
35568 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35575 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35582 \begin_layout Subsection
35586 \begin_layout Standard
35590 \begin_inset space ~
35594 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_inset space ~
35602 \begin_inset space ~
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35610 \begin_inset space ~
35615 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35618 \begin_inset space ~
35622 \begin_inset space ~
35626 \begin_inset space ~
35630 \begin_inset space ~
35634 \begin_inset space ~
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35643 will split it horizontally.
35644 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35645 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35646 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35647 three or more documents at the same time.
35648 To close a split view, use the menu
35651 \begin_inset space ~
35655 \begin_inset space ~
35663 \begin_layout Subsection
35667 \begin_layout Standard
35668 Closes a split view.
35671 \begin_layout Subsection
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35677 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35678 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35679 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35680 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35683 \begin_layout Section
35685 \begin_inset Index idx
35688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35697 \begin_layout Subsection
35701 \begin_layout Standard
35702 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35703 \begin_inset space ~
35707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35709 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35720 \begin_layout Subsection
35722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35724 name "sub:Special-Character"
35731 \begin_layout Standard
35732 Here you can insert the following characters:
35735 \begin_layout Description
35740 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35742 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35743 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35744 You can get a complete display by checking
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35753 \begin_inset Newline newline
35757 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35765 Not all characters will be visible in the
35769 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35777 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35781 ) can display every character.
35789 \begin_layout Description
35790 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35794 \begin_layout Description
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35803 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35810 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35817 \begin_layout Description
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35822 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35825 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35826 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35832 \begin_layout Description
35834 \begin_inset space ~
35837 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35840 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35841 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35847 \begin_layout Description
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35852 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35856 \begin_layout Description
35858 \begin_inset space ~
35861 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35865 \begin_layout Description
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35870 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35876 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35882 \begin_layout Description
35884 \begin_inset space ~
35887 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35891 \begin_layout Description
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35897 \begin_inset Index idx
35900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35907 \begin_inset Index idx
35910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35911 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35916 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35917 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35919 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35924 \begin_inset Index idx
35927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35928 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35934 \begin_inset Newline newline
35937 More information about this feature can be found in the
35943 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35949 \begin_layout Subsection
35953 \begin_layout Standard
35954 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35957 \begin_layout Description
35958 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35959 \begin_inset script superscript
35961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35970 \begin_layout Description
35971 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35972 \begin_inset script subscript
35974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35983 \begin_layout Description
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35988 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35989 \begin_inset space ~
35993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35995 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36002 \begin_layout Description
36004 \begin_inset space ~
36007 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36014 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36021 \begin_layout Description
36023 \begin_inset space ~
36026 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36033 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36040 \begin_layout Description
36042 \begin_inset space ~
36045 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36051 \begin_inset space \space{}
36054 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36055 An example from the LyX
36060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36063 To insert a fraction use the command
36068 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36072 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36081 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36088 \begin_layout Description
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36093 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36094 \begin_inset space ~
36098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36100 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36107 \begin_layout Description
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36112 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36119 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36126 \begin_layout Description
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36131 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36138 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36145 \begin_layout Description
36146 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36153 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36160 \begin_layout Description
36162 \begin_inset space ~
36165 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36172 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36179 \begin_layout Description
36181 \begin_inset space ~
36184 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36191 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36198 \begin_layout Description
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset space ~
36207 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36208 \begin_inset space ~
36212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36214 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36221 \begin_layout Description
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36226 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36227 as described in section
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36234 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36241 \begin_layout Description
36243 \begin_inset space ~
36246 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36253 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36260 \begin_layout Description
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36265 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36266 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36274 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36281 \begin_layout Description
36283 \begin_inset space ~
36286 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36293 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36300 \begin_layout Description
36302 \begin_inset space ~
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36309 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36310 \begin_inset space ~
36314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36316 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36323 \begin_layout Subsection
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36332 \begin_inset space ~
36353 are described in section
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36360 reference "sec:toc"
36369 is described in section
36370 \begin_inset space ~
36374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36376 reference "sec:Index"
36384 is described in section
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36391 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36397 BibTeX Bibliography
36399 is described in section
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36406 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36413 \begin_layout Subsection
36417 \begin_layout Standard
36418 To insert floats, as described in section
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36425 reference "sec:Floats"
36429 and in detail the chapter
36436 \begin_inset space ~
36444 \begin_layout Subsection
36448 \begin_layout Standard
36449 To insert notes, described in section
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36456 reference "sec:Notes"
36463 \begin_layout Subsection
36467 \begin_layout Standard
36468 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36470 Branches are described in section
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36477 reference "sec:Branches"
36484 \begin_layout Subsection
36488 \begin_layout Standard
36489 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36490 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36492 An example is the document class
36493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36500 with three custom insets.
36503 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36507 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36513 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36516 \begin_layout Subsection
36518 \begin_inset Index idx
36521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36530 \begin_layout Standard
36531 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36533 For more information see chapter
36535 External Document Parts
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36544 \begin_layout Subsection
36546 \begin_inset Index idx
36549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36558 \begin_layout Standard
36559 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36560 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36567 \begin_inset space ~
36575 \begin_layout Subsection
36579 \begin_layout Standard
36584 dialog as described in section
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36591 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36598 \begin_layout Subsection
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36607 as described in section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36614 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36621 \begin_layout Subsection
36625 \begin_layout Standard
36630 as described in section
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36637 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36644 \begin_layout Subsection
36646 \begin_inset Index idx
36649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36656 \begin_inset Index idx
36659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36660 Longtables ! Caption
36668 \begin_layout Standard
36669 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36670 Floats are described in section
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36677 reference "sec:Floats"
36681 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36688 \begin_inset space ~
36696 \begin_layout Subsection
36700 \begin_layout Standard
36701 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36702 \begin_inset space ~
36706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36708 reference "sec:Index"
36715 \begin_layout Subsection
36719 \begin_layout Standard
36720 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36727 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36734 \begin_layout Subsection
36738 \begin_layout Standard
36739 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36740 Tables are described in section
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36747 reference "sec:Tables"
36751 and in detail in the chapter
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36766 \begin_layout Subsection
36770 \begin_layout Standard
36776 Graphics are described in section
36777 \begin_inset space ~
36781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36783 reference "sec:Graphics"
36790 \begin_layout Subsection
36794 \begin_layout Standard
36795 Inserts a URL as described in section
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36802 reference "sub:URLs"
36809 \begin_layout Subsection
36813 \begin_layout Standard
36814 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36821 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36828 \begin_layout Subsection
36832 \begin_layout Standard
36833 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36834 \begin_inset space ~
36838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36840 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36847 \begin_layout Subsection
36851 \begin_layout Standard
36852 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36853 \begin_inset space ~
36857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36859 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36866 \begin_layout Subsection
36870 \begin_layout Standard
36871 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36872 title or caption of a float.
36873 Inserts a short title as described in section
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36880 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36887 \begin_layout Subsection
36891 \begin_layout Standard
36892 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36893 \begin_inset space ~
36897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36899 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36906 \begin_layout Subsection
36908 \begin_inset Index idx
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 Inserts a program listings box.
36922 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36924 Program Code Listings
36929 \begin_inset space ~
36937 \begin_layout Subsection
36941 \begin_layout Standard
36942 Inserts the actual date.
36943 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36945 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36953 \begin_inset space ~
36961 \begin_layout Subsection
36965 \begin_layout Standard
36966 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36973 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36980 \begin_layout Section
36982 \begin_inset Index idx
36985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36996 \begin_inset space ~
36999 of the current document.
37000 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37009 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37010 to jump, for example, between section
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37015 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37016 \begin_inset space ~
37019 2.5 and use the submenu
37022 \begin_inset space ~
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37039 \begin_inset space ~
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37049 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37053 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37059 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37062 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37065 \begin_layout Standard
37066 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37075 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37083 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37086 \begin_layout Subsection
37087 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37090 \begin_layout Standard
37091 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37095 \begin_layout Subsection
37099 \begin_layout Standard
37100 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37101 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37102 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37118 \begin_layout Subsection
37122 \begin_layout Standard
37123 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37126 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37136 \begin_inset space ~
37141 manual for a detailed description.
37144 \begin_layout Section
37146 \begin_inset Index idx
37149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37158 \begin_layout Subsection
37162 \begin_layout Standard
37163 Change Tracking is described in section
37164 \begin_inset space ~
37168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37170 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37177 \begin_layout Subsection
37182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37192 \begin_layout Standard
37193 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37195 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37196 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37197 to the clipboard or update the view.
37198 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37201 \begin_layout Subsection
37202 Start Appendix Here
37205 \begin_layout Standard
37206 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37207 as described in section
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37214 reference "sec:Appendices"
37221 \begin_layout Subsection
37223 \begin_inset space ~
37229 \begin_layout Standard
37230 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37231 default output format for the document (menu
37233 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37234 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37235 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37241 \begin_inset space ~
37247 \begin_inset space ~
37251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37253 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37257 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37259 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37260 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37265 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37270 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37272 \begin_inset space ~
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37288 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37292 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37293 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37295 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37296 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37301 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37306 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37316 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37321 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37322 The default output format is
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37333 \begin_layout Subsection
37334 View (Other Formats)
37337 \begin_layout Standard
37338 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37339 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37340 actual document with an external program.
37341 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37342 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37343 All possible formats are listed in section
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37350 reference "sub:Export"
37355 You should at least see the menu entry
37360 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37361 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37368 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37373 \begin_inset Index idx
37376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37377 Reconfiguration of LyX
37385 \begin_layout Standard
37386 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37387 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37389 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37390 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37395 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37400 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37410 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37415 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37418 \begin_layout Subsection
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37428 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37431 \begin_layout Subsection
37432 Update (Other Formats)
37435 \begin_layout Standard
37436 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37437 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37440 \begin_layout Subsection
37441 View Master Document
37444 \begin_layout Standard
37445 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37461 \begin_inset space ~
37466 manual for more information on this topic).
37467 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37468 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37472 \begin_inset space ~
37476 \begin_inset space ~
37481 generates the output of the whole book, while
37485 will just output the chapter alone.
37488 \begin_layout Standard
37489 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37490 in the document settings (menu
37492 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37493 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37494 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37512 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37516 ) or in the preferences (menu
37518 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37519 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37521 \begin_inset space ~
37524 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37529 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37547 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37554 \begin_layout Subsection
37555 Update Master Document
37558 \begin_layout Standard
37559 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37580 manual for more information on this topic).
37581 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37582 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37585 \begin_layout Standard
37586 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37587 in the document settings (menu
37589 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37590 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37591 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37597 \begin_inset space ~
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37609 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37613 ) or in the preferences (menu
37615 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37616 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37621 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37626 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37632 \begin_inset space ~
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37644 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37651 \begin_layout Subsection
37655 \begin_layout Standard
37656 Un/compresses the current document.
37659 \begin_layout Subsection
37663 \begin_layout Standard
37664 The document settings are described in appendix
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37671 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37678 \begin_layout Section
37680 \begin_inset Index idx
37683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37692 \begin_layout Subsection
37696 \begin_layout Standard
37697 Spell checking is explained in section
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37704 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37711 \begin_layout Subsection
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 The thesaurus is described in section
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37723 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37730 \begin_layout Subsection
37732 \begin_inset Index idx
37735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37742 \begin_inset Index idx
37745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37754 \begin_layout Standard
37755 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37756 the highlighted document part.
37759 \begin_layout Subsection
37764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37772 \begin_inset Index idx
37775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37784 \begin_layout Standard
37785 Generates with the help of the program
37789 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37790 This feature is not available on Windows.
37793 \begin_layout Subsection
37798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37806 \begin_inset Index idx
37809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37818 \begin_layout Standard
37819 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37829 to see the full filename paths.
37832 \begin_layout Subsection
37834 \begin_inset Index idx
37837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37846 \begin_layout Standard
37847 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37848 \begin_inset space ~
37852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37854 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37861 \begin_layout Subsection
37863 \begin_inset Index idx
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37867 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37878 Reconfiguration of LyX
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37895 \begin_inset Index idx
37898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 Reconfiguration of LyX
37907 \begin_layout Standard
37908 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37909 needs; see also section
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37916 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37923 \begin_layout Subsection
37927 \begin_layout Standard
37932 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37933 \begin_inset space ~
37937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37939 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37946 \begin_layout Section
37948 \begin_inset Index idx
37951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37960 \begin_layout Standard
37961 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37963 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37971 \begin_inset space ~
37976 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37977 found by LyX (see also section
37978 \begin_inset space ~
37982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37984 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37991 \begin_layout Standard
37995 \begin_inset space ~
38002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38011 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38015 \begin_layout Section
38017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38019 name "sec:Toolbars"
38026 \begin_layout Standard
38027 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38034 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38041 \begin_layout Standard
38042 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38043 This is described in the
38045 Additional Features
38050 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 \begin_inset Index idx
38055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38065 \begin_inset Graphics
38066 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38074 \begin_layout Standard
38075 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38099 \begin_inset Note Note
38102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38103 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38108 manual for more information.
38116 \begin_layout Standard
38117 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38123 \begin_layout Standard
38124 \begin_inset Tabular
38125 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38126 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38127 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38128 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38134 \begin_inset Graphics
38135 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38149 pull-down box for the environments
38162 \begin_layout Standard
38163 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38169 \begin_layout Standard
38171 \begin_inset Tabular
38172 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38173 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38174 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38175 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38199 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38229 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38259 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38275 arg "dialog-show print"
38283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38289 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38305 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38319 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38349 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38379 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38409 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38439 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38469 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38485 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38499 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38539 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38567 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38581 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38582 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38610 Emphasize text, function of the
38612 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38614 \begin_inset space ~
38617 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38647 Set text to noun style, function of the
38649 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38654 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 arg "textstyle-apply"
38680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38684 Format text using the current settings in the
38686 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38688 \begin_inset space ~
38691 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38723 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38724 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38726 \begin_inset space ~
38735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38744 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38758 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38772 arg "tabular-insert"
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38786 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38814 Toggle outline window on/off,
38816 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38844 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38859 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38871 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38884 \begin_layout Subsection
38886 \begin_inset Index idx
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38898 \begin_layout Standard
38899 \begin_inset Graphics
38900 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38908 \begin_layout Standard
38909 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38915 \begin_layout Standard
38916 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38920 \begin_layout Standard
38921 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38927 \begin_layout Standard
38928 \begin_inset Tabular
38929 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38930 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38931 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38932 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 arg "layout Enumerate"
38977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38996 arg "layout Itemize"
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39050 arg "layout Description"
39058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39077 arg "depth-increment"
39085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39091 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39093 \begin_inset space ~
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39115 arg "depth-decrement"
39123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39135 \begin_inset space ~
39144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 arg "float-insert figure"
39161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39167 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39168 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 arg "float-insert table"
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39198 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39199 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39229 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39245 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39259 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39275 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39289 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39319 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39321 \begin_inset space ~
39330 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 arg "nomencl-insert"
39347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39355 \begin_inset space ~
39364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 arg "footnote-insert"
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39403 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39451 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39452 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39465 \begin_inset space ~
39474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39483 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39527 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39557 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39606 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39607 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39623 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39637 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39638 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39640 \begin_inset space ~
39649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39658 arg "dialog-show character"
39666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39672 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39674 \begin_inset space ~
39677 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39693 arg "layout-paragraph"
39701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39707 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39727 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39741 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39755 \begin_layout Subsection
39756 View/Update Toolbar
39757 \begin_inset Index idx
39760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39761 Toolbar ! View / Update
39769 \begin_layout Standard
39770 \begin_inset Graphics
39771 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39778 \begin_layout Standard
39779 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39785 \begin_layout Standard
39786 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39790 \begin_layout Standard
39791 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39797 \begin_layout Standard
39798 \begin_inset Tabular
39799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39800 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39802 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39826 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39842 arg "buffer-update"
39850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39856 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39872 arg "master-buffer-view"
39880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39886 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 arg "master-buffer-update"
39914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39922 \begin_inset space ~
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39944 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39958 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39959 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39960 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39961 Synchronize with Output
39967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39972 \begin_inset Graphics
39973 filename ../images/view-others.png
39975 groupId toolbarbuttons
39986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39992 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39993 View (Other Formats)
39999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40004 \begin_inset Graphics
40005 filename ../images/update-others.png
40007 groupId toolbarbuttons
40016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40022 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40023 Update (Other Formats)
40036 \begin_layout Standard
40037 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40041 \begin_layout Subsection
40045 \begin_layout Standard
40046 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40047 \begin_inset space ~
40051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40053 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40057 , the table toolbar
40058 \begin_inset Index idx
40061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 \begin_inset space ~
40075 manual and the math macro toolbar
40076 \begin_inset Index idx
40079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40092 \begin_layout Chapter
40093 The Document Settings
40094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40096 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40101 \begin_inset Index idx
40104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40105 Document ! Settings
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40117 \begin_inset space ~
40122 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40123 is called with the menu
40125 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40129 You can save your document settings as default with the
40131 Save as Document Defaults
40133 button in any dialog.
40134 This will create a template named
40138 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40142 \begin_layout Standard
40147 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40148 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40151 \begin_layout Standard
40152 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40153 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40154 to find the one you are looking for.
40155 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40156 the submenus of the dialog.
40158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40162 \begin_inset space \space{}
40166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40173 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40174 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40175 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40178 \begin_layout Section
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40185 Document classes are described in section
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40192 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40200 \begin_layout Standard
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40209 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40213 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40214 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40216 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40225 \begin_layout Standard
40226 Some classes use special class options by default.
40227 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40231 and you can decide to use them or not.
40232 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40233 recommended you leave them untouched.
40238 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40243 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40244 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40250 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40251 \begin_inset Newline newline
40256 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40259 \begin_inset Newline newline
40262 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40268 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40270 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40282 \begin_layout Standard
40287 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40288 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40289 document is opened without its master.
40290 This way child documents are always compilable.
40291 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40317 \begin_inset Index idx
40320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40321 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40327 \begin_inset Index idx
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40331 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40336 for cross-references, see section
40337 \begin_inset space ~
40341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40343 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40350 \begin_layout Section
40354 \begin_layout Standard
40355 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40356 Please refer to the section
40359 \begin_inset space ~
40367 \begin_inset space ~
40372 manual for details.
40375 \begin_layout Section
40379 \begin_layout Standard
40380 Modules are explained in section
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40387 reference "sub:Modules"
40394 \begin_layout Section
40398 \begin_layout Standard
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40406 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40413 \begin_layout Section
40417 \begin_layout Standard
40418 The document font settings are described in section
40419 \begin_inset space ~
40423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40425 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40432 \begin_layout Section
40436 \begin_layout Standard
40437 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40454 and whether it should be a
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40462 can also be specified here.
40465 \begin_layout Standard
40466 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40468 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40470 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40473 \begin_layout Section
40477 \begin_layout Standard
40478 This dialog is described in sections
40479 \begin_inset space ~
40483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40485 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40492 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40499 \begin_layout Section
40503 \begin_layout Standard
40504 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40511 reference "sub:Margins"
40518 \begin_layout Section
40520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40522 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40527 \begin_inset Index idx
40530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40531 Language ! Encoding
40539 \begin_layout Standard
40540 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40541 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40542 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40543 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40544 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40545 known for a particular character).
40549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40550 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40555 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40560 manual for details.
40568 \begin_layout Standard
40569 If you use the option
40573 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40574 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40575 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40576 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40577 exactly one encoding.
40578 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40581 \begin_layout Standard
40582 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40583 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40584 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40585 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40586 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40587 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40592 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40593 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40594 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40595 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40596 engines to standard LaTeX.
40597 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40598 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40601 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40620 \begin_inset space ~
40627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40651 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40656 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40660 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40663 \begin_layout Standard
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40672 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40682 The possible settings are:
40685 \begin_layout Description
40686 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40688 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40689 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40693 \begin_inset space ~
40697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40699 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40706 \begin_layout Description
40707 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40708 format you will use.
40709 In many cases this will be
40714 \begin_inset Index idx
40717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40718 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40724 If the newer package
40729 \begin_inset Index idx
40732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40733 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40738 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40739 this package will be used instead of
40746 \begin_layout Description
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40759 would be more appropriate.
40762 \begin_layout Description
40763 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40764 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40768 (for German texts), type in
40771 \begin_inset Newline newline
40776 usepackage{ngerman}
40779 \begin_layout Description
40780 None will not use a language package.
40781 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40784 \begin_layout Standard
40785 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40788 \begin_layout Description
40790 \begin_inset space ~
40794 \begin_inset space ~
40798 \begin_inset space ~
40805 , but the LaTeX-package
40810 \begin_inset Index idx
40813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40814 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40820 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40821 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40822 languages in TeX code.
40825 \begin_layout Description
40826 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40827 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40828 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40831 \begin_layout Description
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40840 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40843 \begin_layout Description
40845 \begin_inset space ~
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40852 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40855 \begin_layout Description
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40860 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40863 \begin_layout Description
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40869 \begin_inset space ~
40872 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40873 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40876 \begin_layout Description
40878 \begin_inset space ~
40882 \begin_inset space ~
40885 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40889 \begin_layout Description
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40898 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40899 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40902 \begin_layout Description
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40915 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_layout Description
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40935 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40936 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40939 \begin_layout Description
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40948 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40949 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40950 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40961 \begin_layout Description
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40970 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40971 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40972 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40973 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40984 \begin_layout Description
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40990 \begin_inset space ~
40993 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40996 \begin_layout Description
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41005 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41008 \begin_layout Description
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41017 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41020 \begin_layout Description
41022 \begin_inset space ~
41025 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41028 \begin_layout Description
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41033 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41036 \begin_layout Description
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41045 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41048 \begin_layout Description
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_layout Description
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41066 \begin_inset space ~
41069 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41072 \begin_layout Description
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41084 \begin_layout Description
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41090 \begin_inset space ~
41093 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41098 \begin_inset Index idx
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41102 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41107 , when using this, set the document language to
41112 \begin_layout Description
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41121 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41125 , when using this, set the document language to
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41134 \begin_layout Description
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41143 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41148 \begin_inset Index idx
41151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41152 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41157 , when using this, set the document language to
41162 \begin_layout Description
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41171 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41175 , when using this, set the document language to
41180 \begin_layout Description
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41189 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41193 , when using this, set the document language to
41198 \begin_layout Description
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41203 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41206 \begin_layout Description
41208 \begin_inset space ~
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41216 \begin_inset space ~
41219 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41222 \begin_layout Description
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_inset space ~
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41235 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41236 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41237 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41240 \begin_layout Description
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41246 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_layout Description
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41261 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41262 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41265 \begin_layout Description
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41274 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41279 \begin_inset Index idx
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41288 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41291 \begin_layout Description
41293 \begin_inset space ~
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41300 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41308 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41313 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41315 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41318 \begin_layout Description
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41327 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41332 \begin_inset Index idx
41335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41336 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41341 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41344 \begin_layout Description
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41349 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41354 \begin_inset Index idx
41357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41358 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41364 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41368 \begin_layout Description
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41374 \begin_inset space ~
41378 \begin_inset space ~
41381 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_layout Description
41390 \begin_inset space ~
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41401 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41402 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41403 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41407 \begin_layout Description
41409 \begin_inset space ~
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41420 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41421 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41424 \begin_layout Section
41426 \begin_inset Index idx
41429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41436 \begin_inset Index idx
41439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41446 \begin_inset Index idx
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41450 Color ! Shaded boxes
41456 \begin_inset Index idx
41459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41460 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41468 \begin_layout Standard
41469 Here you can alter the font color for the
41473 (default: black), for
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41481 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41485 (default: white) and for
41488 \begin_inset space ~
41498 sets the color back to the default.
41501 \begin_layout Standard
41502 Clicking any button showing
41510 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41511 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41512 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41513 later more quickly.
41516 \begin_layout Standard
41517 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41521 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41526 out note appears blue in the output.)
41534 \begin_layout Standard
41535 Note, if you change the
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41543 font color and use the option
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41551 in the document settings under
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41559 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41566 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41580 \begin_layout Standard
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41593 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41598 Code after a forced page break:
41601 \begin_layout Itemize
41602 For the page color:
41603 \begin_inset Newline newline
41610 pagecolor{color name}
41613 \begin_layout Itemize
41614 For the text color:
41615 \begin_inset Newline newline
41625 \begin_layout Standard
41626 You are restricted to one of
41662 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41669 \begin_inset space ~
41675 \begin_inset Newline newline
41678 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41679 names to refer to them:
41682 \begin_layout Itemize
41688 \begin_inset Newline newline
41693 page_backgroundcolor
41696 \begin_layout Itemize
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41706 \begin_inset Newline newline
41714 \begin_layout Itemize
41718 \begin_inset space ~
41724 \begin_inset Newline newline
41732 \begin_layout Itemize
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41742 \begin_inset Newline newline
41750 \begin_layout Standard
41751 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41755 Cells of the Embedded
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41762 \begin_layout Section
41766 \begin_layout Standard
41767 Here you can adjust the
41771 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41775 as described in section
41776 \begin_inset space ~
41780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41782 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41789 \begin_layout Section
41793 \begin_layout Standard
41794 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41799 \begin_inset Index idx
41802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41803 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41813 \begin_inset Index idx
41816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41817 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41825 Sectioned bibliography
41827 using the LaTeX package
41832 \begin_inset Index idx
41835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41836 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41841 and you can select a
41845 for the generation of the bibliography.
41846 For a further description see section
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41853 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41860 \begin_layout Section
41864 \begin_layout Standard
41865 Here you can define the
41869 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41877 reference "sec:Index"
41884 \begin_layout Section
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 The PDF properties are explained in section
41890 \begin_inset space ~
41894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41896 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41903 \begin_layout Section
41907 \begin_layout Standard
41908 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41913 \begin_inset Index idx
41916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41917 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41927 \begin_inset Index idx
41930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41931 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41941 \begin_inset Index idx
41944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41945 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41955 \begin_inset Index idx
41958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41959 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41964 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41967 \begin_layout Description
41968 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41969 ensure that you have enabled
41972 \begin_inset space ~
41980 \begin_layout Description
41981 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41984 \begin_inset space ~
41996 \begin_layout Description
41997 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42008 \begin_layout Description
42009 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42011 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42020 \begin_layout Section
42024 \begin_layout Standard
42025 The float placement options are described in the section
42028 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset space ~
42044 \begin_layout Section
42048 \begin_layout Standard
42049 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42051 Program Code Listings
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42064 \begin_layout Section
42068 \begin_layout Standard
42069 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42077 set to be used and set the
42082 The itemize environment is described in section
42083 \begin_inset space ~
42087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42089 reference "sec:Itemize"
42096 \begin_layout Standard
42097 You can furthermore specify a
42100 \begin_inset space ~
42105 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42106 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42113 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42119 \begin_inset space \space{}
42123 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42133 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42134 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42137 \begin_layout Standard
42138 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42146 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42149 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42150 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42158 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42162 usepackage{textcomp}
42165 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42169 usepackage{amssymb}
42179 \begin_layout Section
42183 \begin_layout Standard
42184 Branches are described in section
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42191 reference "sec:Branches"
42198 \begin_layout Section
42200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42202 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42209 \begin_layout Standard
42210 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42213 \begin_layout Description
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42222 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42242 View Master Document
42243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42250 Update Master Document
42251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42258 menu or the toolbar.
42259 The default is set in
42261 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42262 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42267 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42277 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42284 \begin_layout Description
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42293 Output settings for the menu
42295 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42297 \begin_inset space ~
42303 For a detailed description see section
42305 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42310 \begin_inset space ~
42318 \begin_layout Description
42320 \begin_inset space ~
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42327 Options offers settings for the export format
42333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42351 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42352 \begin_inset space ~
42355 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42359 \begin_inset space ~
42364 settings are described in detail in section
42366 Math Output in XHTML
42371 \begin_inset space ~
42380 \begin_inset space ~
42384 \begin_inset space ~
42389 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42392 \begin_layout Section
42397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42407 \begin_layout Standard
42408 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42409 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42410 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42411 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42415 \begin_layout Standard
42416 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42417 \begin_inset space ~
42421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42423 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42430 \begin_layout Chapter
42436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42438 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42443 \begin_inset Index idx
42446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42455 \begin_layout Standard
42456 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42458 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42462 It has the following submenus.
42465 \begin_layout Section
42469 \begin_layout Subsection
42473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42474 User Interface File
42475 \begin_inset Index idx
42478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42479 Customization ! of toolbars
42485 \begin_inset Index idx
42488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42489 Customization ! of menus
42497 \begin_layout Standard
42498 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42499 interface (ui) file.
42500 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42508 \begin_layout Description
42513 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42516 \begin_layout Description
42523 the menu entries in popup context menus
42526 \begin_layout Description
42531 specifies the toolbar buttons
42534 \begin_layout Standard
42535 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42536 and edit the entries.
42539 \begin_layout Standard
42540 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42552 entries must be finished with an explicit
42577 and in the case of the
42578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42590 The syntax for the entries is:
42593 \begin_layout Standard
42594 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42624 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42627 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42629 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42642 \begin_inset space ~
42650 \begin_layout Standard
42651 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42657 \begin_layout Standard
42658 For example, assuming you use the menu
42660 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42663 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42668 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42694 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42709 to have the sixth bookmark.
42712 \begin_layout Standard
42716 \begin_inset space ~
42721 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42722 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42726 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42737 \begin_layout Standard
42740 Enable tool tips in main work area
42742 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42750 \begin_layout Standard
42753 Restore window layouts and geometries
42755 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42756 in the last LyX session.
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42762 Restore cursor positions
42764 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42771 Load opened files from last session
42773 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42776 \begin_layout Standard
42779 Clear all session information
42781 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42782 of last opened documents, etc.).
42785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42789 name "sub:Backup documents"
42794 \begin_inset Index idx
42797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42806 \begin_layout Standard
42809 Backup original documents when saving
42811 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42812 it was saved the last time.
42813 It is stored in the
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42828 reference "sec:Paths"
42832 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42835 \begin_inset space ~
42841 The backup file has the file extension
42842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42856 \begin_layout Standard
42859 Backup documents, every
42861 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42864 \begin_layout Standard
42867 Save documents compressed by default
42869 always saves files in a compressed format.
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42877 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42880 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42882 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42893 Open documents in tabs
42895 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42898 \begin_layout Standard
42903 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42915 reference "sec:Paths"
42919 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42925 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42927 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42930 \begin_layout Standard
42933 Single close-tab button
42935 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42938 \begin_inset Graphics
42939 filename ../images/closetab.png
42946 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42947 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42950 \begin_layout Standard
42951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42959 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42967 \begin_layout Subsection
42969 \begin_inset Index idx
42972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42981 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42988 \begin_layout Standard
42989 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43001 This section only deals with the fonts
43006 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43009 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43010 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43021 \begin_layout Standard
43022 By default, LyX uses
43038 (depends on the system) as its
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43057 \begin_layout Standard
43058 You can change the font size with the
43065 \begin_layout Standard
43070 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43075 points have the size of 1
43076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43080 \begin_inset space ~
43084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43086 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43091 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43096 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43103 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43110 \begin_layout Standard
43113 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43115 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43116 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43117 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43118 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43120 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43121 \begin_inset space ~
43127 \begin_layout Subsection
43129 \begin_inset Index idx
43132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43139 \begin_inset Index idx
43142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43151 \begin_layout Standard
43152 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43153 the list and selecting the
43160 \begin_layout Standard
43161 By checking the option
43165 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43168 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43169 \begin_inset space ~
43173 \begin_inset space ~
43178 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43181 \begin_layout Subsection
43183 \begin_inset Index idx
43186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43195 \begin_layout Standard
43196 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43199 \begin_layout Standard
43204 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43205 This feature is described in section
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43212 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43220 Checking the option
43223 \begin_inset space ~
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43231 \begin_inset space ~
43236 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43239 \begin_layout Section
43241 \begin_inset Index idx
43244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43253 \begin_layout Subsection
43257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43264 Cursor follows scrollbar
43266 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43270 \begin_layout Standard
43271 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43272 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43273 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43279 Scroll below end of document
43281 is self-explanatory.
43284 \begin_layout Standard
43285 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43292 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43294 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43295 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43298 \begin_layout Standard
43301 Sort environments alphabetically
43303 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43306 \begin_layout Standard
43309 Group environments by their category
43311 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43314 \begin_layout Standard
43319 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43334 \begin_layout Standard
43335 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43340 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43341 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43345 \begin_layout Subsection
43347 \begin_inset Index idx
43350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43357 \begin_inset Index idx
43360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 Settings ! Shortcuts
43369 \begin_layout Standard
43374 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43375 Several binding files are available, among them:
43378 \begin_layout Description
43379 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43382 \begin_layout Description
43383 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43395 \begin_layout Description
43396 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43407 \begin_layout Standard
43408 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43413 , and binding files for special languages.
43414 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43419 \begin_inset space \space{}
43423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43431 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43435 \begin_layout Standard
43436 Some binding files, like
43440 , only have a limited scope.
43441 When looking at the end of the file
43445 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43448 \begin_layout Standard
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43456 \begin_inset space ~
43461 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43462 in the selected key binding file.
43465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43469 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43474 \begin_inset Index idx
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43478 Key Bindings ! Editing
43486 \begin_layout Standard
43487 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43488 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43489 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43492 Show key-bindings containing
43495 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43496 Insert there for example as keyword
43497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43504 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43505 functions that contain
43506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43514 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43515 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43519 that you will find in the
43526 \begin_layout Standard
43527 For example, to add the shortcut
43535 , select the function and press the
43540 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43541 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43544 \begin_layout Standard
43545 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43546 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43547 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43548 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43549 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43554 \begin_layout Standard
43555 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43558 \begin_layout Standard
43559 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43561 The syntax of the entries is:
43564 \begin_layout Standard
43570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43588 \begin_layout Subsection
43590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43592 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43597 \begin_inset Index idx
43600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43607 \begin_inset Index idx
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43611 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43619 \begin_layout Standard
43620 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43621 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43622 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43623 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43630 \begin_inset space ~
43635 and select the keyboard map file named
43642 \begin_layout Standard
43651 keyboard map and, if you use the
43655 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43658 arg "keymap-primary"
43664 arg "keymap-secondary"
43667 respectively or toggle between them with
43670 arg "keymap-toggle"
43676 \begin_layout Standard
43677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43685 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43694 \begin_layout Standard
43695 You can also specify the mouse
43697 Wheel scrolling speed
43700 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43704 \begin_layout Standard
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43721 you can select a key for zooming.
43722 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43725 \begin_layout Subsection
43729 \begin_layout Standard
43730 Input completion is described in section
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43737 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43744 \begin_layout Section
43746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43753 \begin_inset Index idx
43756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43763 \begin_inset Index idx
43766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43775 \begin_layout Standard
43776 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43778 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43781 \begin_layout Description
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43786 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43787 It is the default when you
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43806 \begin_layout Description
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43811 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43813 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43815 \begin_inset space ~
43819 \begin_inset space ~
43827 \begin_layout Description
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43832 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43838 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43842 \begin_inset Newline newline
43846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43866 \begin_layout Description
43868 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_inset Index idx
43875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43881 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43882 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43889 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43897 will be used to save the backups.
43898 \begin_inset Newline newline
43901 Backup files have the ending
43902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43912 \begin_layout Description
43917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43928 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43929 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43930 \begin_inset Newline newline
43937 You add a BibTeX-database
43942 You can edit this file with the program
43951 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43954 \begin_inset space ~
43960 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43965 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43966 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43972 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43973 \begin_inset Newline newline
43976 The pipe is also used for the
43981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43987 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43992 \begin_inset Newline newline
43995 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43996 \begin_inset Newline newline
44012 \begin_layout Description
44014 \begin_inset space ~
44017 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44020 \begin_layout Description
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44025 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44026 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44027 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44030 \begin_layout Description
44032 \begin_inset space ~
44035 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44041 You only need to specify it if you are using
44045 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44051 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44060 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44061 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44062 where to find it on the system.
44063 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44064 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44073 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44074 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44077 \begin_layout Description
44079 \begin_inset space ~
44082 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44083 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44085 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44087 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44088 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44089 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44090 scanned for the input files.
44091 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44092 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44093 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44094 compilation may fail for some documents.
44097 \begin_layout Section
44101 \begin_layout Standard
44102 Here you can insert your
44111 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44119 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44123 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44126 \begin_layout Section
44128 \begin_inset Index idx
44131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44132 Language ! Settings
44138 \begin_inset Index idx
44141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44142 Settings ! Language
44150 \begin_layout Subsection
44152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44154 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44161 \begin_layout Description
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44170 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44171 You can find its actual translation status here:
44172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44174 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44181 \begin_layout Description
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44186 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44188 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44189 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44206 The most widespread language package is
44211 \begin_inset Index idx
44214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44215 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44220 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44221 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44222 alternative language package
44227 \begin_inset Index idx
44230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44236 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44237 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44243 The available selections are described in section
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44250 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44257 \begin_layout Description
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44262 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44263 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44264 An example is the start command
44270 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44290 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44295 \begin_layout Description
44297 \begin_inset space ~
44305 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44306 command toggles the package on and off.
44309 \begin_layout Description
44311 \begin_inset space ~
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44318 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44322 \begin_layout Description
44324 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44331 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44332 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44333 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44334 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44341 \begin_layout Description
44343 \begin_inset space ~
44346 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44348 When this option is not set, the
44351 \begin_inset space ~
44356 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44357 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_layout Description
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44382 When it is not set, the
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44390 is set to the end of the document.
44393 \begin_layout Description
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44399 \begin_inset space ~
44402 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44403 language will be underlined in blue.
44406 \begin_layout Description
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44415 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44416 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44419 \begin_layout Description
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44424 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44425 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44426 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44427 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44430 \begin_layout Subsection
44434 \begin_layout Standard
44435 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44436 \begin_inset space ~
44440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44442 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44449 \begin_layout Section
44453 \begin_layout Subsection
44457 \begin_layout Description
44459 \begin_inset space ~
44463 \begin_inset space ~
44466 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44469 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44470 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44472 \begin_inset space ~
44478 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44481 \begin_layout Description
44483 \begin_inset space ~
44487 \begin_inset Index idx
44490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 \begin_inset Index idx
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44501 Settings ! Date format
44506 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44507 \begin_inset Newline newline
44511 \begin_inset Flex URL
44514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44516 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44522 \begin_inset Newline newline
44525 For example the format
44526 \begin_inset Newline newline
44530 \begin_inset Newline newline
44533 prints the date as day/month/year.
44536 \begin_layout Description
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44545 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44548 \begin_layout Description
44550 \begin_inset space ~
44553 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44555 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44557 \begin_inset space ~
44563 For a detailed description see section
44565 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44578 \begin_layout Subsection
44580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44587 \begin_inset Index idx
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 \begin_inset Index idx
44600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44609 \begin_layout Description
44611 \begin_inset space ~
44614 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44619 The name will be used when the
44624 \begin_inset Newline newline
44628 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44636 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44644 \begin_layout Description
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44649 command is the command LyX
44650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44657 LaTeX uses for printing.
44665 \begin_layout Description
44667 \begin_inset space ~
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44674 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44675 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44676 of the program that provides the
44683 \begin_layout Description
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44696 printer This option works only for the
44701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44713 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44714 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44717 \begin_layout Subsection
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44732 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44737 \begin_inset Index idx
44740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44749 \begin_layout Description
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44770 \begin_inset space ~
44773 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44778 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44799 are used for Cyrillic.
44800 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44813 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44814 LyX sets up in the background.
44815 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44818 \begin_layout Description
44820 \begin_inset space ~
44824 \begin_inset space ~
44827 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44832 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44835 \begin_layout Description
44837 \begin_inset space ~
44841 \begin_inset space ~
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44849 \begin_inset space ~
44852 options They only have an effect when the program
44856 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44859 \begin_layout Standard
44860 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44861 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44862 manuals of the applications.
44865 \begin_layout Description
44867 \begin_inset space ~
44870 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44871 \begin_inset space ~
44875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44877 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44884 \begin_layout Description
44886 \begin_inset space ~
44889 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44896 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44903 \begin_layout Description
44905 \begin_inset space ~
44908 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44915 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44922 \begin_layout Description
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44935 \begin_inset space ~
44938 command Command for the program
44942 that is described in the section
44948 Additional Features
44953 \begin_layout Standard
44954 There are additionally the following options:
44957 \begin_layout Description
44959 \begin_inset space ~
44963 \begin_inset space ~
44967 \begin_inset space ~
44971 \begin_inset space ~
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44978 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44996 to separate folders.
44997 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44998 \begin_inset Index idx
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45008 \begin_inset Index idx
45011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45020 \begin_layout Description
45022 \begin_inset space ~
45026 \begin_inset space ~
45030 \begin_inset space ~
45034 \begin_inset space ~
45038 \begin_inset space ~
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45045 changes Removes all manually set
45051 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45052 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45059 dialog when changing the document class.
45062 \begin_layout Section
45064 \begin_inset space ~
45068 \begin_inset Index idx
45071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45080 \begin_layout Subsection
45082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45084 name "sub:Converters"
45089 \begin_inset Index idx
45092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 \begin_layout Standard
45102 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45103 from one format to another.
45104 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45105 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45117 field and press the
45122 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45131 drop-down list, modify the
45135 field and press the
45142 \begin_layout Standard
45145 Converter File Cache
45151 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45153 Maximum Age (in days
45156 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45157 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45160 \begin_layout Standard
45161 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45162 definition, is described in the section
45173 \begin_layout Subsection
45175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45177 name "sec:File-Formats"
45182 \begin_inset Index idx
45185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45192 \begin_inset Index idx
45195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 \begin_layout Standard
45205 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45214 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45217 \begin_layout Standard
45218 You can also define the
45220 Default output format
45222 that is used when you use
45224 View, Update, View Master Document
45228 Update Master Document
45234 menu or the toolbar.
45237 \begin_layout Standard
45238 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45249 \begin_layout Standard
45250 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45251 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45252 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45253 This is done by specifying a
45258 More about this is described in the section
45269 \begin_layout Chapter
45270 Units available in LyX
45271 \begin_inset Index idx
45274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45283 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45290 \begin_layout Standard
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45298 reference "tab:Units"
45302 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45305 \begin_layout Standard
45306 \begin_inset Float table
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45313 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45331 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 \begin_inset Tabular
45340 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45341 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45342 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45343 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45494 scaled point (65536
45495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45551 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45555 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45610 % of original image width
45617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45824 \begin_layout Chapter
45826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45828 name "chap:Credits"
45835 \begin_layout Standard
45836 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45837 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45840 \begin_layout Itemize
45843 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45846 \begin_layout Itemize
45852 \begin_layout Itemize
45858 \begin_layout Itemize
45864 \begin_layout Itemize
45870 \begin_layout Itemize
45876 \begin_layout Itemize
45882 \begin_layout Itemize
45888 \begin_layout Itemize
45891 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45894 \begin_layout Itemize
45900 \begin_layout Itemize
45906 \begin_layout Itemize
45912 \begin_layout Itemize
45918 \begin_layout Itemize
45924 \begin_layout Itemize
45930 \begin_layout Itemize
45936 \begin_layout Itemize
45942 \begin_layout Itemize
45944 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45953 \begin_layout Standard
45954 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45957 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45964 \begin_layout Bibliography
45965 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45966 LatexCommand bibitem
45973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45976 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45981 \begin_inset Newline newline
45985 \begin_inset Flex URL
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45998 \begin_layout Bibliography
45999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46000 LatexCommand bibitem
46001 key "latexcompanion"
46005 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46007 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46010 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46013 \begin_layout Bibliography
46014 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46015 LatexCommand bibitem
46020 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46023 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46026 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46029 \begin_layout Bibliography
46030 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46031 LatexCommand bibitem
46038 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46041 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46044 \begin_layout Bibliography
46045 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46046 LatexCommand bibitem
46058 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46061 \begin_layout Bibliography
46062 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46063 LatexCommand bibitem
46069 \begin_inset Newline newline
46073 \begin_inset Flex URL
46076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46086 \begin_layout Bibliography
46087 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46088 LatexCommand bibitem
46094 \begin_inset Newline newline
46098 \begin_inset Flex URL
46101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46103 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46111 \begin_layout Bibliography
46112 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46113 LatexCommand bibitem
46119 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46121 name "Documentation"
46122 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46131 \begin_inset Newline newline
46135 \begin_inset Flex URL
46138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46140 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46148 \begin_layout Bibliography
46149 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46150 LatexCommand bibitem
46156 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46158 name "Documentation"
46159 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46163 how to use the program
46168 \begin_inset Newline newline
46172 \begin_inset Flex URL
46175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46177 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46185 \begin_layout Bibliography
46186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46187 LatexCommand bibitem
46193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46195 name "Documentation"
46196 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46205 \begin_inset Newline newline
46209 \begin_inset Flex URL
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46222 \begin_layout Bibliography
46223 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46224 LatexCommand bibitem
46230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46232 name "Documentation"
46233 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46242 \begin_inset Newline newline
46246 \begin_inset Flex URL
46249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46251 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46259 \begin_layout Bibliography
46260 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46261 LatexCommand bibitem
46267 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46269 name "Documentation"
46270 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46274 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46275 \begin_inset Newline newline
46279 \begin_inset Flex URL
46282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46284 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46292 \begin_layout Bibliography
46293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46294 LatexCommand bibitem
46300 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46302 name "Documentation"
46303 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46307 of the LaTeX-package
46312 \begin_inset Index idx
46315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46322 \begin_inset Newline newline
46326 \begin_inset Flex URL
46329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46331 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46339 \begin_layout Bibliography
46340 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46341 LatexCommand bibitem
46347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46349 name "Documentation"
46350 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46354 of the LaTeX-package
46359 \begin_inset Index idx
46362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46369 \begin_inset Newline newline
46373 \begin_inset Flex URL
46376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46386 \begin_layout Bibliography
46387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46388 LatexCommand bibitem
46394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46396 name "Documentation"
46397 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46401 of the LaTeX-package
46406 \begin_inset Index idx
46409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46410 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46416 \begin_inset Newline newline
46420 \begin_inset Flex URL
46423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46433 \begin_layout Bibliography
46434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46435 LatexCommand bibitem
46441 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46443 name "Documentation"
46444 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46448 of the LaTeX-package
46453 \begin_inset Index idx
46456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46457 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46463 \begin_inset Newline newline
46467 \begin_inset Flex URL
46470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46472 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46480 \begin_layout Bibliography
46481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46482 LatexCommand bibitem
46488 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46490 name "Documentation"
46491 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46495 of the LaTeX-package
46500 \begin_inset Index idx
46503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46510 \begin_inset Newline newline
46514 \begin_inset Flex URL
46517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46519 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46527 \begin_layout Bibliography
46528 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46529 LatexCommand bibitem
46535 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46537 name "Documentation"
46538 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46542 of the LaTeX-package
46547 \begin_inset Index idx
46550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46551 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46557 \begin_inset Newline newline
46561 \begin_inset Flex URL
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46566 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46574 \begin_layout Bibliography
46575 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46576 LatexCommand bibitem
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46584 name "Documentation"
46585 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46589 of the LaTeX-package
46594 \begin_inset Index idx
46597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46598 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46604 \begin_inset Newline newline
46608 \begin_inset Flex URL
46611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46613 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46621 \begin_layout Bibliography
46622 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46623 LatexCommand bibitem
46629 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46632 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46636 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46637 \begin_inset Newline newline
46641 \begin_inset Flex URL
46644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46646 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46654 \begin_layout Bibliography
46655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46656 LatexCommand bibitem
46662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46665 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46669 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46670 \begin_inset Newline newline
46674 \begin_inset Flex URL
46677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46679 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46687 \begin_layout Bibliography
46688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46689 LatexCommand bibitem
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46698 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46702 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46703 \begin_inset Newline newline
46707 \begin_inset Flex URL
46710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46712 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46720 \begin_layout Bibliography
46721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46722 LatexCommand bibitem
46728 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46731 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46735 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46736 \begin_inset Newline newline
46740 \begin_inset Flex URL
46743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46753 \begin_layout Bibliography
46754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46755 LatexCommand bibitem
46761 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46764 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46768 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46769 \begin_inset Newline newline
46773 \begin_inset Flex URL
46776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46778 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46786 \begin_layout Bibliography
46787 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46788 LatexCommand bibitem
46794 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46797 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46801 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46802 \begin_inset Newline newline
46806 \begin_inset Flex URL
46809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46811 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46819 \begin_layout Bibliography
46820 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46821 LatexCommand bibitem
46827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46830 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46834 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46835 \begin_inset Newline newline
46839 \begin_inset Flex URL
46842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46844 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46852 \begin_layout Bibliography
46853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46854 LatexCommand bibitem
46860 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46863 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46867 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46868 \begin_inset Newline newline
46872 \begin_inset Flex URL
46875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46877 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46885 \begin_layout Bibliography
46886 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46887 LatexCommand bibitem
46893 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46896 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46900 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46901 \begin_inset Newline newline
46905 \begin_inset Flex URL
46908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46910 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46918 \begin_layout Bibliography
46919 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46920 LatexCommand bibitem
46926 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46929 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46933 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46934 \begin_inset Newline newline
46938 \begin_inset Flex URL
46941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46943 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46951 \begin_layout Bibliography
46952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46953 LatexCommand bibitem
46959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46962 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46966 about new features in
46971 \begin_inset Newline newline
46975 \begin_inset Flex URL
46978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46980 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46988 \begin_layout Standard
46989 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47023 \begin_inset Note Note
47026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47033 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47034 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47035 bibliography is the second one:
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47044 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47045 LatexCommand bibtex
47046 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47047 options "biblio/alphadin"
47054 \begin_layout Standard
47055 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47058 \begin_layout Standard
47059 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47060 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47066 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47067 LatexCommand printindex